Service Manual

TDS7000 Series
Digital Phosphor Oscilloscopes
(TDS7104 & TDS7054)
071-0711-03

This document applies to firmware version 2.3.2

and above.

Warning
The servicing instructions are for use by qualified
personnel only. To avoid personal injury, do not
perform any servicing unless you are qualified to
do so. Refer to all safety summaries prior to
performing service.

www.tektronix.com
Copyright © Tektronix, Inc. All rights reserved.

Tektronix products are covered by U.S. and foreign patents, issued and pending. Information in this publication supercedes
that in all previously published material. Specifications and price change privileges reserved.

Tektronix, Inc., P.O. Box 500, Beaverton, OR 97077

TEKTRONIX and TEK are registered trademarks of Tektronix, Inc.

 WARRANTY

Tektronix warrants that the products that it manufactures and sells will be free from defects in materials and workmanship
for a period of one (1) year from the date of shipment. If this product proves defective during its warranty period,
Tektronix, at its option, will either repair the defective product without charge for parts and labor, or provide a replacement
in exchange for the defective product.

This warranty applies only to products returned to the designated Tektronix depot or the Tektronix authorized
representative from which the product was originally purchased. For products returned to other locations, Customer will be
assessed an applicable service charge. The preceding limitation shall not apply within the European Economic Area, where
products may be returned for warranty service to the nearest designated service depot regardless of the place of purchase.

In order to obtain service under this warranty, Customer must provide the applicable office of Tektronix or its authorized
representative with notice of the defect before the expiration of the warranty period and make suitable arrangements for the
performance of service. Customer shall be responsible for packaging and shipping the defective product to the service
center designated by Tektronix or its representative, with shipping charges prepaid. Tektronix or its representative shall pay
for the return of the product to Customer. Customer shall be responsible for paying any associated taxes or duties.

This warranty shall not apply to any defect, failure or damage caused by improper use or improper or inadequate
maintenance and care. Tektronix shall not be obligated to furnish service under this warranty:

a) to repair damage resulting from attempts by personnel other than Tektronix representatives to install, repair or service
the product;
b) to repair damage resulting from improper use or connection to incompatible equipment;
c) to repair any damage or malfunction caused by the use of non-Tektronix supplies or consumables;
d) to repair a product that has been modified or integrated with other products when the effect of such modification or
integration increases the time or difficulty of servicing the product; or
e) to repair damage or malfunction resulting from failure to perform user maintenance and cleaning at the frequency and
as prescribed in the user manual (if applicable).

THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE GIVEN BY TEKTRONIX WITH RESPECT TO THIS PRODUCT IN LIEU OF ANY OTHER
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS DISCLAIM ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. TEKTRONIX’ RESPONSIBILITY TO REPAIR OR
REPLACE DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS IS THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY PROVIDED TO THE CUSTOMER FOR
BREACH OF THIS WARRANTY. TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT,
SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IRRESPECTIVE OF WHETHER TEKTRONIX OR THE
VENDOR HAS ADVANCE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
Table of Contents

General Safety Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi

Service Safety Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
Manual Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
Manual Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
Related Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvi
Contacting Tektronix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii

Specifications
Product and Feature Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-- 1
Acquisition Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-- 2
Signal Processing Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-- 2
Display Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-- 3
Measurement Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-- 3
Trigger Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-- 3
Convenience Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-- 4
Specification Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-- 5

Operating Information
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-- 1
Before You Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-- 1
Environmental Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-- 1
Connect the Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-- 2
Power On the Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-- 4
Powering Off the Oscilloscope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-- 5
Create an Emergency Startup Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-- 5
Software Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-- 6
Operating Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-- 7
Back Up User Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-- 7
User Interface Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-- 7
Front Panel Controls Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-- 9
Front Panel I/O Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-- 10
Instrument Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-- 10
Signal Path Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-- 10
Using the Online Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-- 11

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual i

Table of Contents

Theory of Operation
Logic Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-- 1
Module Overviews . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-- 1
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-- 1
Input Signal Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-- 1
Display Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-- 2
Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-- 2
Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-- 3
Low Voltage Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-- 3
Fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-- 3

Performance Verification
Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-- 2
Brief Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--5
Self Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-- 5
Verify Internal Adjustment, Self Compensation, and Diagnostics . . . . . . . 4-- 5
Functional Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-- 6
Verify All Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-- 7
Verify the Time Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-- 10
Verify the A (Main) and B (Delayed) Trigger Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-- 12
Verify the File System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-- 13
Performance Tests — Semi-Automated Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--17
Overview of the Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-- 19
Initial Instrumentation Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-- 20
Test Program Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-- 22
Test Program Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-- 23
Performance Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--27
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-- 27
Equipment Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-- 28
TDS7000 Test Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-- 30
Signal Acquisition System Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-- 35
Check DC Voltage Measurement Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-- 35
Check DC Gain Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-- 39
Check Analog Bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-- 43
Check Delay Between Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-- 48
Check Channel Isolation (Crosstalk) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-- 52
Time Base System Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-- 57
Check Long-Term Sample Rate and Delay Time Accuracy and
Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-- 57
Check Delta Time Measurement Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-- 62
Trigger System Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-- 65
Check Time Accuracy for Pulse, Glitch, Timeout, and
Width Triggering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-- 65
Check Sensitivity, Edge Trigger, DC Coupled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-- 69
Output Signal Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-- 74
Check Outputs — CH 3 Signal Out and Aux Trigger Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-- 74
Check Probe Compensation Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-- 77
Sine Wave Generator Leveling Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-- 81

ii TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Table of Contents

Adjustment Procedure
Adjustment Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--1
Adjustment Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-- 1
Adjustment Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-- 1
Adjustment Dependencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-- 1
Adjustment After Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-- 1
Required Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-- 2
Overview of the Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-- 3
Instrumentation Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-- 4
Adjustment Program Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-- 9
Adjustment Program Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-- 10

Maintenance
Preventing ESD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-- 1
Inspection and Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-- 2
General Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-- 2
Interior Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-- 2
Exterior Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-- 2
Flat Panel Display Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-- 3
Removal and Installation Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--7
Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-- 7
Procedures for External Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-- 9
Procedures for Outer-Chassis Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-- 20
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--51
Service Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-- 51
Check for Common Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-- 51
Equipment Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-- 53
Fault Isolation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-- 53
PPC and NLX PC Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-- 58
Firmware Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-- 62
After Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-- 63
BIOS Error Messages (Bali NLX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-- 63
BIOS Error Messages (Radisys NLX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-- 64
BIOS Beep Codes (Bali NLX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-- 67
BIOS Beep Codes (Radisys NLX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-- 68
Dip Switch Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-- 68
Diagnostic LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-- 69
Troubleshooting Using Reset Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-- 71
Update/Restore the NLX Board CMOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-- 73
Installing an Authorization Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-- 74
Hard Disk Drive Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-- 75
Repackaging Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--77
Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-- 77
Shipping to the Service Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-- 77

Options
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-- 1
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-- 2

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual iii

Table of Contents

Electrical Parts List

Electrical Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--1
Diagrams
Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--1
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-- 1

Mechanical Parts List

Parts Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-- 1
Module Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-- 1
Using the Replaceable Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-- 2
Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-- 2
Mfr. Code to Manufacturer Cross Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-- 2

iv TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Table of Contents

List of Figures

Figure 2--1: Locations of peripheral connectors on rear panel . . . . . 2--3

Figure 2--2: Line fuse and power cord connector locations,
rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--4
Figure 2--3: On/Standby switch location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--5

Figure 4--1: Toolbar and menu bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--3

Figure 4--2: Universal test hookup for functional
tests -- CH 1 shown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--7
Figure 4--3: Channel button location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--8
Figure 4--4: Setup for time base test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--10
Figure 4--5: Setup for trigger test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--12
Figure 4--6: Setup for the file system test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--14
Figure 4--7: Initial setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--20
Figure 4--8: Setup to characterize signal source outputs . . . . . . . . . . 4--23
Figure 4--9: Setup to check delay between channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--24
Figure 4--10: Setup to check delta time accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--24
Figure 4--11: Setup to check probe compensation output . . . . . . . . . 4--25
Figure 4--12: Setup to check analog signal output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--25
Figure 4--13: Setup to check auxiliary output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--25
Figure 4--14: Initial test hookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--36
Figure 4--15: Measurement of DC accuracy at maximum
offset and position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--38
Figure 4--16: Initial test hookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--39
Figure 4--17: Measurement of DC gain accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--42
Figure 4--18: Initial test hookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--44
Figure 4--19: Optional initial test hookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--44
Figure 4--20: Measurement of analog bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--47
Figure 4--21: Initial test hookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--49
Figure 4--22: Measurement of channel delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--51
Figure 4--23: Initial test hookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--53
Figure 4--24: Initial test hookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--57
Figure 4--25: Measurement of accuracy -- long-term and
delay time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--59
Figure 4--26: Initial test hookup for external reference . . . . . . . . . . . 4--60
Figure 4--27: Final test hookup for external reference input . . . . . . . 4--61
Figure 4--28: Delta time accuracy test hookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--62

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual v

Table of Contents

Figure 4--29: Initial test hookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--66

Figure 4--30: Measurement of time accuracy for pulse and
glitch triggering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--67
Figure 4--31: Initial test hookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--70
Figure 4--32: Measurement of trigger sensitivity -- 50 MHz
results shown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--71
Figure 4--33: Initial test hookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--74
Figure 4--34: Measurement of main trigger out limits . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--76
Figure 4--35: Initial test hookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--77
Figure 4--36: Measurement of probe compensator frequency . . . . . . 4--78
Figure 4--37: Subsequent test hookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--79
Figure 4--38: Measurement of probe compensator amplitude . . . . . . 4--80
Figure 4--39: Sine wave generator leveling equipment setup . . . . . . 4--81
Figure 4--40: Equipment setup for maximum amplitude . . . . . . . . . 4--83

Figure 5--1: Adjustment setup using a separate controller . . . . . . . . 5--4

Figure 5--2: Adjustment setup using the oscilloscope as
the controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--5
Figure 5--3: National Instruments GPIB Interface Properties
dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--8

Figure 6--1: Line fuse and line cord removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--10

Figure 6--2: Knob removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--11
Figure 6--3: Trim removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--13
Figure 6--4: Bottom cover removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--14
Figure 6--5: Cover removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--16
Figure 6--6: Cover removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--17
Figure 6--7: External modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--18
Figure 6--8: Internal modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--19
Figure 6--9: Front-panel assembly removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--21
Figure 6--10: J1 flex cable connector removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--22
Figure 6--11: Front panel board and keyboard removal . . . . . . . . . . 6--23
Figure 6--12: Display removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--25
Figure 6--13: Touch panel and LCD assembly removal . . . . . . . . . . . 6--26
Figure 6--14: Display adaptor board removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--27
Figure 6--15: Cable clip removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--27
Figure 6--16: Power flex circuit removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--29
Figure 6--17: Floppy disk drive removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--30
Figure 6--18: Hard disk drive removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--32
Figure 6--19: Removing the hard disk drive from the cartridge . . . . 6--32

vi TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Table of Contents

Figure 6--20: CD drive and bracket removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--34

Figure 6--21: Fan assembly removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--35
Figure 6--22: Front and rear power distribution and PA bus
boards removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--37
Figure 6--23: Low-voltage power supply removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--38
Figure 6--24: NLX battery removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--39
Figure 6--25: NLX assembly removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--42
Figure 6--26: Riser adapter and NLX board removal . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--44
Figure 6--27: Microprocessor removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--46
Figure 6--28: PPC Processor board removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--48
Figure 6--29: Acquisition circuit board removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--50
Figure 6--30: Primary troubleshooting tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--54
Figure 6--31: Location of power-on and over current LEDs . . . . . . . 6--55
Figure 6--32: Location of debug pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--56
Figure 6--33: Connectors J1 and J2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--57
Figure 6--34: The three PCI busses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--71
Figure 6--35: PCI and NLX video connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--72
Figure 6--36: Location of jumpers and reset button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--73
Figure 9--1: TDS7000 series block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--2

Figure 10--1: External parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10--6

Figure 10--2: Front panel and drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10--8
Figure 10--3: Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10--11
Figure 10--4: Acquisition assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10--12
Figure 10--5: Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10--13

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual vii

Table of Contents

List of Tables

Table 1--1: TDS7000 models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--1

Table 1--2: Channel input and vertical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--5
Table 1--3: Horizontal and acquisition system specifications . . . . . . 1--10
Table 1--4: Trigger specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--12
Table 1--5: Display specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--15
Table 1--6: Input/output port specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--16
Table 1--7: Data storage specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--18
Table 1--8: Power source specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--18
Table 1--9: Mechanical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--19
Table 1--10: Environmental specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--20
Table 1--11: Certifications and compliances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--21

Table 2--1: Additional accessory connection information . . . . . . . . . 2--2

Table 2--2: Line fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--4

Table 4--1: Required equipment and materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--17

Table 4--2: Test sequence overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--19
Table 4--3: GPIB devices required by test program . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--21
Table 4--4: Test equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--28
Table 4--5: DC Voltage measurement accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--37
Table 4--6: Gain accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--41
Table 4--7: Analog bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--46
Table 4--8: Delay between channels worksheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--52
Table 4--9: Delta time measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--64

Table 5--1: Adjustments required for module replaced . . . . . . . . . . . 5--1

Table 5--2: Required equipment and materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--2
Table 5--3: GPIB devices required by test program . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--6
Table 5--4: Renaming the GPIB devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--8
Table 5--5: Setting the GPIB addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--9

Table 6--1: External inspection check list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--3

Table 6--2: Internal inspection check list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--4
Table 6--3: Tools required for module removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--8
Table 6--4: Failure symptoms and possible causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--51
Table 6--5: Power supply voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--56

viii TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Table of Contents

Table 6--6: Power-on diagnostic tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--59

Table 6--7: Action required for module replaced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--63
Table 6--8: BIOS Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--63
Table 6--9: BIOS Error messages (Radisys) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--65
Table 6--10: Beep codes (Bali) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--67
Table 6--11: Beep codes (Radisys) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--68
Table 6--12: DIP switch functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--69
Table 6--13: Diagnostic LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--70

Table 7--1: Standard accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--2

Table 7--2: Optional accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--3

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual ix

Table of Contents

x TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

General Safety Summary
Review the following safety precautions to avoid injury and prevent damage to
this product or any products connected to it. To avoid potential hazards, use this
product only as specified.
Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures.
While using this product, you may need to access other parts of the system. Read
the General Safety Summary in other system manuals for warnings and cautions
related to operating the system.

To Avoid Fire or Use Proper Power Cord. Use only the power cord specified for this product and
Personal Injury certified for the country of use.

Connect and Disconnect Properly. Do not connect or disconnect probes or test

leads while they are connected to a voltage source.
Ground the Product. This product is grounded through the grounding conductor
of the power cord. To avoid electric shock, the grounding conductor must be
connected to earth ground. Before making connections to the input or output
terminals of the product, ensure that the product is properly grounded.
Observe All Terminal Ratings. To avoid fire or shock hazard, observe all ratings
and markings on the product. Consult the product manual for further ratings
information before making connections to the product.
Do Not Operate Without Covers. Do not operate this product with covers or panels
removed.
Use Proper Fuse. Use only the fuse type and rating specified for this product.
Avoid Exposed Circuitry. Do not touch exposed connections and components
when power is present.
Wear Eye Protection. Wear eye protection if exposure to high-intensity rays or
laser radiation exists.
Do Not Operate With Suspected Failures. If you suspect there is damage to this
product, have it inspected by qualified service personnel.
Do Not Operate in Wet/Damp Conditions.
Do Not Operate in an Explosive Atmosphere.
Keep Product Surfaces Clean and Dry.
Provide Proper Ventilation. Refer to the manual’s installation instructions for
details on installing the product so it has proper ventilation.

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual xi

General Safety Summary

Symbols and Terms Terms in this Manual. These terms may appear in this manual:

WARNING. Warning statements identify conditions or practices that could result

in injury or loss of life.

CAUTION. Caution statements identify conditions or practices that could result in

damage to this product or other property.

Terms on the Product. These terms may appear on the product:

DANGER indicates an injury hazard immediately accessible as you read the
marking.
WARNING indicates an injury hazard not immediately accessible as you read the
marking.
CAUTION indicates a hazard to property including the product.
Symbols on the Product. The following symbols may appear on the product:

CAUTION WARNING Protective Ground

Refer to Manual High Voltage (Earth) Terminal

Mains Disconnected Mains Connected Standby

OFF (Power) ON (Power)

xii TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

Service Safety Summary

Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures. Read this Service
Safety Summary and the General Safety Summary before performing any service
procedures.
Do Not Service Alone. Do not perform internal service or adjustments of this
product unless another person capable of rendering first aid and resuscitation is
present.
Disconnect Power. To avoid electric shock, switch off the instrument power, then
disconnect the power cord from the mains power.
Use Care When Servicing With Power On. Dangerous voltages or currents may
exist in this product. Disconnect power, remove battery (if applicable), and
disconnect test leads before removing protective panels, soldering, or replacing
components.
To avoid electric shock, do not touch exposed connections.

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual xiii

Service Safety Summary

xiv TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

Preface

This is the service manual for the TDS7000 Digital Oscilloscope products. Read
this preface to learn how this manual is structured, what conventions it uses, and
where you can find other information related to servicing this product. Read the
Introduction following this preface for safety and other important background
information needed before using this manual for servicing this product.

Manual Structure
This manual is divided into chapters, which are made up of related subordinate
topics. These topics can be cross referenced as sections.
Be sure to read the introductions to all procedures. These introductions provide
important information needed to do the service correctly, safely, and efficiently.

Manual Conventions
This manual uses certain conventions that you should become familiar with
before attempting service.

Modules Throughout this manual, any replaceable component, assembly, or part is

referred to by the term module. A module is composed of electrical and
mechanical assemblies, circuit cards, interconnecting cables, and user-accessible
controls.

Replaceable Parts This manual refers to any field-replaceable assembly or mechanical part
specifically by its name or generically as a replaceable part. In general, a
replaceable part is any circuit board or assembly, such as the hard disk drive, or a
mechanical part, such as the I/O port connectors, that is listed in the replaceable
parts list of Chapter 10.

Safety Symbols and terms related to safety appear in the Service Safety Summary found
at the beginning of this manual.

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual xv

Preface

Related Documentation
The oscilloscope, electrical sampling modules and optical sampling modules
come with the following manuals:
H CSA7000, TDS7000 & TDS6000 Series User manual. Tektronix part number
071-7010-XX.
H CSA7000, TDS7000 & TDS6000 Series Reference manual. Tektronix part
number 020-2404-XX.

H TDS7000 & TLA600 Series Rackmount Kit (Option 1R) Instructions.

Tektronix part number 071-0716-XX.

xvi TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Preface

Contacting Tektronix

Phone 1-800-833-9200*

Address Tektronix, Inc.

Department or name (if known)
14200 SW Karl Braun Drive
P.O. Box 500
Beaverton, OR 97077
USA

Web site www.tektronix.com

Sales support 1-800-833-9200, select option 1*

Service support 1-800-833-9200, select option 2*

Technical support Email: [email protected]

1-800-833-9200, select option 3*
1-503-627-2400
6:00 a.m. - 5:00 p.m. Pacific time

* This phone number is toll free in North America. After office hours, please leave a
voice mail message.
Outside North America, contact a Tektronix sales office or distributor; see the
Tektronix web site for a list of offices.

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual xvii

Preface

xviii TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

Specifications

This chapter contains the specifications for the TDS7000 series Digital Phosphor
Oscilloscopes. All specifications are guaranteed unless labeled “typical.” Typical
specifications are provided for your convenience but are not guaranteed.
Specifications that are marked with the n symbol are checked in chapter four,
Performance Verification.
All specifications apply to all models unless noted otherwise. To meet specifica-
tions, the following conditions must be met:
H The instrument must have been calibrated in an ambient temperature
between 20 °C and 30 °C (68 °F and 86 °F).
H The instrument must be operating within the environmental limits listed in
Table 1--10 on page 1--20.
H The instrument must be powered from a source that meets the specifications
listed in Table 1--8 on page 1--18.

H The instrument must have been operating continuously for at least 20

minutes within the specified operating temperature range.
H You must perform the Signal Path Compensation procedure after the
20-minute warm-up period, and if the ambient temperature changes more
than 5 °C (41 °F), repeat the procedure. See Run the signal-path compensa-
tion routine on page 4--6 for instructions to perform this procedure.

Product and Feature Description

Your oscilloscope is shown in Table 1--1.

Table 1- 1: TDS7000 models

Number of Maximum sample

Model channels Bandwidth rate (real time)
TDS7054 4 500 MHz 5 GS/s
TDS7104 4 1 GHz 10 GS/s

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 1- 1

Specifications

Acquisition Features Separate Digitizers. Ensure accurate timing measurements with separate digitizers
for each channel. Acquisition on multiple channels is always concurrent. The
digitizers can also be combined to yield a higher sample rate on a single channel.

Fast Acquisition. Acquire up to 400,000 waveforms per second to see rapidly

changing signals or intermittent signal irregularities.

Long Record Lengths. Choose record lengths from 500 points to up to 500,000
points per channel (up 2,000,000 points on a single channel). Extend the
maximum record length up to a maximum of 16,000,000 points with memory
options.

Peak Detect Acquisition Mode. See pulses as narrow as 400 ps even at the slower
time base settings. Peak detect helps you see noise and glitches in your signal.

Acquisition Control. Acquire continuously or set up to capture single shot

acquisitions. Enable or disable optional acquisition features such as equivalent
time or roll mode. Use Fast Frame acquisition to capture and time stamp many
events in a rapid sequence.

Horizontal Delay. Use delay when you want to acquire a signal at a significant
time interval after the trigger point. Toggle delay on and off to quickly compare
the signal at two different points in time.

Signal Processing Average, Envelope, and Hi Res Acquisition. Use Average acquisition mode to
Features remove uncorrelated noise from your signal. Use Envelope to capture and
display the maximum variation of the signal. Use Hi Res to increase vertical
resolution for lower bandwidth signals.

Waveform Math. Set up simple math waveforms using the basic arithmetic
functions or create more advanced math waveforms using the math expression
editor. Waveform expressions can even contain measurement results and other
math waveforms.

Spectral Analysis. Display spectral magnitude and phase waveforms based on

your time-domain acquisitions. Control the instrument using the traditional
spectrum analyzer controls such as span and center frequency.

1- 2 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Specifications

Display Features Color LCD Display. Identify and differentiate waveforms easily with color coding.
Waveforms, readouts, and inputs are color matched to increase productivity and
reduce operating errors. Enhance visualization of waveforms with color grading.

Digital Phosphor. A Digital Phosphor Oscilloscope can clearly display intensity

modulation in your signals. The instrument automatically overlays subsequent
acquisitions and then decays them to simulate the writing and decay of the
phosphor in an analog instrument CRT. The feature results in an intensity-graded
or color-graded waveform display that shows the information in the intensity
modulation.

Fit to Screen. The Digital Phosphor technology performs the compression

required to represent all record points on the screen, even at the maximum record
length settings.

Zoom. To take advantage of the full resolution of the instrument you can zoom in
on a waveform to see the fine details. Both vertical and horizontal zoom
functions are available. Zoomed waveforms can be aligned, locked, and
automatically scrolled.

Measurement Features Cursors. Use cursors to take simple voltage, time, and frequency measurements.

Automatic Measurements. Choose from a large palette of amplitude, time, and

histogram measurements. You can customize the measurements by changing
reference levels or by adding measurement gating.

Mask Testing. Option SM only. Provides mask testing for verifying compliance to
standards.

Trigger Features Simple and Advanced Trigger Types. Choose simple edge trigger or choose from
eight advanced trigger types to help you capture a specific signal fault or event.

Dual Triggers. Use the A (main) trigger system alone or add the B trigger to
capture more complex events. You can use the A and B triggers together to set
up a delay-by-time or delay-by-events trigger condition.

Comm Triggers. Option SM only. Use comm triggers to trigger on communica-

tion signals.

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 1- 3

Specifications

Convenience Features Autoset. Use Autoset to quickly set up the vertical, horizontal, and trigger
controls for a usable display. If a standard mask is active (Option SM only),
Autoset adjusts the selected waveform to match the mask, if possible.

Touch Screen Interface. You can operate all instrument functions (except the
power switch and the touch screen enable/disable switch) from the touch screen
interface. If convenient, you can also install a mouse and keyboard to use the
interface.

Toolbar or Menu Bar. You can choose a toolbar operating mode that is optimized
for use with the touch screen, or a PC-style menu-bar operating mode that is
optimized for use with a mouse.

Open Desktop. The instrument is built on a Microsoft Windows software

platform; the instrument application program starts automatically when you
apply power to the instrument. You can minimize the instrument application and
take full advantage of the built-in PC to run other applications. Moving
waveform images and data into other applications is as simple as a copy/paste
operation.

Dedicated Front Panel Controls. The front panel contains knobs and buttons to
provide immediate access to the most common instrument controls. Separate
vertical controls are provided for each channel. The same functions are also
available through the screen interface.

Data Storage and I/O. The instrument has a removeable hard disk drive, a CD-RW
drive, and a floppy disk drive that can be used for storage and retrieval of data.
The instrument has GPIB, USB, Centronics, COM, and Ethernet ports for input
and output to other devices.

Online Help. The instrument has a complete online help system that covers all its
features. The help system is context sensitive; help for the displayed control
window is automatically shown if you touch the help button. Graphical aids in
the help windows assist you in getting to the information you need. You can also
access the help topics through a table of contents or index.

1- 4 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Specifications

Specification Tables

Table 1- 2: Channel input and vertical specifications

Characteristic Description
Input channels Four, all identical
Input coupling DC, AC, and GND
Channel input is disconnected from input termination
when using GND coupling.
Input impedance, DC coupled 1 MΩ ± 0.5% in parallel with 10 pF (
3 pF)
50 Ω ±1%; VSWR ≤ 1.3:1 from DC to 500 MHz, ≤ 1.5:1
from 500 MHz to 1 GHz
Maximum voltage at input BNC 150 VRMS CAT I,
(1 MΩ)
For steady state sinusoidal waveforms, derate at
20 dB/decade above 200 kHz to 9 VRMS at 3 MHz and
above
Maximum voltage at input BNC 5 VRMS, with peaks ≤ ±30 V
(50 Ω)
n Delay between channels ≤ 50 ps between any two channels with the same scale
and coupling settings
n Channel-to-channel crosstalk ≥ 100:1 at 100 MHz, and ≥ 30:1 at the rated bandwidth
for any two channels with the same scale and coupling
settings
Digitizers 8-bit resolution, separate digitizers for each channel
sample simultaneously
Sensitivity range 1 MΩ: 1 mV/div to 10 V/div, in a 1-2-5 sequence
50 Ω: 1 mV/div to 1 V/div, in a 1-2-5 sequence
Fine adjustment available with ≥1% resolution

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 1- 5

Specifications

Table 1- 2: Channel input and vertical specifications (Cont.)

Characteristic Description
n Analog bandwidth DC 50 Ω coupling, bandwidth limit set to Full, operating
ambient ≤30 °C, derated by 2.5 MHz/°C above 30 °C
SCALE range Bandwidth
1 mV/div to 1.99 mV/div TDS7054: DC to 450 MHz
TDS7104: DC to 500 MHz
2 mV/div to 4.98 mV/div TDS7054: DC to 500 MHz
TDS7104: DC to 600 MHz
5 mV/div to 9.95 mV/div TDS7054: DC to 500 MHz
TDS7104: DC to 750 MHz
10 mV/div to 1 V/div TDS7054: DC to 500 MHz
TDS7104: DC to 1 GHz
Analog bandwidth limit, typical Selectable between 20 MHz, 200 MHz, or Full
Lower frequency limit, AC coupled < 10 Hz for 1 MΩ, reduced by a factor of ten when using
a 10X probe; <200 kHz for 50 Ω
Calculated rise time, typical DC 50 Ω coupling, bandwidth limit set to Full
SCALE range Rise time
1 mV/div to 1.99 mV/div TDS7054: 890 ps
TDS7104: 800 ps
2 mV/div to 4.98 mV/div TDS7054: 800 ps
TDS7104: 667 ps
5 mV/div to 9.95 mV/div TDS7054: 800 ps
TDS7104: 533 ps
10 mV/div to 1 V/div TDS7054: 800 ps
TDS7104: 400 ps

1- 6 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Specifications

Table 1- 2: Channel input and vertical specifications (Cont.)

Characteristic Description
Step response settling errors, Bandwidth limit set to Full
t i l
typical
SCALE range and step Settling error at time after
amplitude step
1 mV/div to 100 mV/div, 20 ns: ≤ 0.5%
with ≤ 2 V step
100 ns: ≤ 0.2%
20 ms: ≤ 0.1%
101 mV/div to 1 V/div, 20 ns: ≤ 1.0%
with ≤ 20 V step
100 ns: ≤ 0.5%
20 ms: ≤ 0.2%
1.01 V/div to 10 V/div, 20 ns: ≤ 1.0%
with ≤ 200 V step
100 ns: ≤ 0.5%
20 ms: ≤ 0.2%
Position range ± 5 divisions
Offset range SCALE range Offset range
1 mV/div to 100 mV/div ±1 V
101 mV/div to 1 V/div ±10 V
1.01 V/div to 10 V/div ±100 V
Offset accuracy SCALE range Offset range
1 mV/div to 100 mV/div ±(0.2% ×| net offset | +
1.5 mV + 0.1 div ×V/div
setting)
101 mV/div to 1 V/div ±(0.25% ×| net offset | +
15 mV + 0.1 div ×V/div
setting)
1.01 V/div to 10 V/div ±(0.25% ×| net offset | +
150 mV + 0.1 div ×V/div
setting)
Net offset is the nominal voltage that must be applied to
the channel to bring the trace to center screen.
Net offset = offset - (position × volts/division) and is
expressed in volts

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 1- 7

Specifications

Table 1- 2: Channel input and vertical specifications (Cont.)

Characteristic Description
DC gain accuracy, ±1% in Sample or Average acquisition mode
DC voltage measurement accuracy Measurement type DC accuracy (in volts)
Sample acquisition mode, Absolute measurement of ±[(1.0% × | reading - net
typical any waveform point, and offset | ) + offset accuracy +
High, Low, Max, and Min (0.13 div × V/div setting) +
measurements 0.6 mV]
Delta voltage measurement ±[(1.0% × | reading | ) +
between any two points (0.26 div × V/div setting) +
acquired under the same 1.2 mV]
setup and ambient condi-
tions, and all other auto-
matic measurements
Net offset = offset - (position × volts/division) and is
expressed in volts
n Average acquisition Absolute measurement of ±[(1.0% × | reading - net
mode (≥16 averages) any waveform point, and offset | ) + offset accuracy
High, Low, Max, and Min +(0.06 × V/div)]
measurements
Delta voltage measurement ±[(1.0% × | reading | ) +
between any two points (0.1 div × V/div setting) +
acquired under the same 0.3 mV]
setup and ambient condi-
tions, and all other auto-
matic measurements
Net offset = offset - (position × volts/division) and is
expressed in volts
Nonlinearity, typical < 1 LSB differential, < 1 LSB integral, independently
based

1- 8 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Specifications

Table 1- 2: Channel input and vertical specifications (Cont.)

Characteristic Description
Effective bits, typical Sine wave input at the indicated frequency and pk-pk
amplitude, at 50 mV/division and 25 °C
Signal and input conditions Effective bits
TDS7054 1 MHz, 9.2 div, 2 GS/s 6.8 bits
sample rate, Sample
acquisition mode
1 MHz, 9.2 div, 10 MS/s 8.7 bits
sample rate, HiRes acquisi-
tion mode
500 MHz, 6.5 div, 2 GS/s 6.8 bits
sample rate, Sample
acquisition mode
TDS7104 1 MHz, 9.2 div, 10 GS/s 6.6 bits
sample rate, Sample
acquisition mode
1 MHz, 9.2 div, 10 MS/s 8.7 bits
sample rate, HiRes acquisi-
tion mode
1 GHz, 6.5 div, 10 GS/s 5.5 bits
sample rate, Sample
acquisition mode

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 1- 9

Specifications

Table 1- 3: Horizontal and acquisition system specifications

Characteristic Description
Acquisition modes Sample, Peak detect, Hi Res, Average, Envelope, and
Waveform database
Acquisition rate up to 200,000 waveforms per second in Fast Acquisition
mode
up to 130 waveforms per second with Fast Acquisition off
Minimum record length 500 points
Maximum record length Depends on the number of active channels and the record
length options installed
Standard 500,000 points (3 or 4 channels)
1,000,000 points (1 or 2 channels only)
2,000,000 points (1 channel only)
Option 2M installed 2,000,000 points (3 or 4 channels)
4,000,000 points (1 or 2 channels only)
8,000,000 points (1 channel only)
Option 3M installed 4,000,000 points (3 or 4 channels)
8,000,000 points (1 or 2 channels only)
16,000,000 points (1 channel only)
Real-time sample rate range Number of channels Sample rate range
acquired
TDS7054 1 1.25 S/s to 5 GS/s
2 1.25 S/s to 5 GS/s
3 or 4 1.25 S/s to 2.5 GS/s
TDS7104 1 1.25 S/s to 10 GS/s
2 1.25 S/s to 5 GS/s
3 or 4 1.25 S/s to 2.5 GS/s
Equivalent-time sample rate or 5 GS/s to 250 GS/s
interpolated waveform rate range
Equivalent-time acquisition can be enabled or disabled.
When disabled, waveforms are interpolated at the fastest
time base settings.
Seconds/division range 200 ps/div to 40 s/div
Horizontal delay range 0 s to 1000 s

1- 10 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Specifications

Table 1- 3: Horizontal and acquisition system specifications (Cont.)

Characteristic Description
n Long term sample rate and ±15 ppm over any ≥ 1 ms interval
delay time accuracy
RMS aperture uncertainty, typical ≤ [3 ps + (0.1 ppm × record duration)]
n Delta time measurement accu- For a single channel, with signal amplitude > 5 div,
racy reference level set at 50%, interpolation set to sin(x)/x,
volts/division set to ≥ 5 mV/div, with (displayed
risetime)/(sample interval) ratio between 1.4 and 4, where
sample interval = 1/(real-time sample rate)
Conditions Accuracy
Single shot signal, Sample ± (15 ppm × | reading | +
or Hi Res acquisition mode, 0.3 sample intervals)
Full bandwidth
Average acquisition mode, ± (15 ppm × | reading | +
≥100 averages, Full band- 20 ps)
width
Maximum Fast Frame update rate, 160,000 frames per second
typical
Frame length and maximum Maximum number of frames for Sample or Peak Detect
number of frames acquisition mode, depending on memory option installed
Frame length Maximum number of
frames
50 points Standard: 645-- 2936
Option 2M: 2657-- 12044
Option 3M: 5318-- 24096
500 points Standard: 445-- 1780
Option 2M: 1829-- 7316
Option 3M: 3659-- 14636
5000 points Standard: 90-- 360
Option 2M: 371-- 1484
Option 3M: 742-- 2968
50,000 points Standard: 10-- 40
Option 2M: 41-- 164
Option 3M: 82-- 328
500,000 points Standard: 1-- 4
Option 2M: 4-- 16
Option 3M: 8-- 32

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 1- 11

Specifications

Table 1- 4: Trigger specifications

Characteristic Description
Auxiliary trigger input resistance, ≥ 1.5 kΩ
typical
Maximum trigger input voltage, ±20 V (DC or peak AC)
typical
n Edge Trigger Sensitivity Trigger Source Sensitivity
TDS7054 Any channel, DC coupled 0.35 div from DC to
50 MHz, increasing to 1 div
at 500 MHz
Auxiliary input 400 mV from DC to
50 MHz, increasing to 750
mV at 100 MHz
TDS7104 Any channel, DC coupled 0.35 div from DC to
50 MHz, increasing to 1 div
at 1 GHz
Auxiliary input 250 mV from DC to
50 MHz, increasing to 500
mV at 100 MHz
Edge trigger sensitivity, typical All sources, for vertical scale settings ≥10 mV/div and
≤1 V/div
Trigger coupling Sensitivity
NOISE REJ 3×the DC-coupled limits
AC Same as DC-coupled limits
for frequencies ≥60 Hz,
attenuates signals <60 Hz
HF REJ 1.5×the DC-coupled limits
from DC to 30 kHz, attenu-
ates signals >30 kHz
LF REJ 1.5×the DC-coupled limits
for frequencies ≥80 kHz,
attenuates signals <80 kHz
Advanced trigger sensitivity, typical For all trigger types except Edge, with vertical scale
settings ≥10 mV/div and ≤1 V/div
1.0 div, from DC to 500 MHz
Trigger level or threshold range Trigger Source Range
Any channel ±12 divisions from center of
screen
Auxiliary input ±8 V
Line Not settable

1- 12 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Specifications

Table 1- 4: Trigger specifications (Cont.)

Characteristic Description
Trigger level or threshold accuracy, Edge trigger, DC coupling, for signals having rise and fall
typical times ≤20 ns
Trigger Source Accuracy
Any channel ± [(2% × | setting - net
offset | ) + (0.3 div × volts/
div setting) + offset accu-
racy]
Auxiliary Not calibrated or specified
where, net offset = offset - (position × volts/division)
Set level to 50% function Operates with signals ≥30 Hz
Trigger position error, typical Edge trigger, DC coupling, for signals having a slew rate
at the trigger point of ≥ 0.5 div/ns
Acquisition mode Error
Sample, Average ± (1 displayed point + 1ns)
Envelope ± (2 displayed points + 1ns)
Trigger jitter, typical σ = 8 ps
B Event (Delayed) trigger Trigger After Time Trigger on n th Event
Range Delay time = 16 ns to 250 s Event count = 1 to 107
Minimum time between arm 2 ns from the end of the 2 ns between the A trigger
(A Event) and trigger time period to the B trigger event and the first B trigger
(B Event), typical event event
Minimum pulse width, — B event width ≥1 ns
typical
Maximum frequency, typical — B event frequency
≤500 MHz

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 1- 13

Specifications

Table 1- 4: Trigger specifications (Cont.)

Characteristic Description
Advanced trigger timing For vertical scale settings ≥10 mV/div and ≤1 V/div
Minimum recognizable Minimum re-arm time to
event width or time recognize next event
Glitch type Minimum glitch width = 1 ns 2 ns + 5% of glitch width
setting
Runt type Minimum runt width = 2 ns 2 ns
Runt type Minimum runt width = 2 ns 8.5 ns + 5% of runt width
setting
Width type Minimum difference 2 ns + 5% of upper limit
between upper and lower setting
limits = 1 ns
Timeout type Minimum timeout time = 2 ns + 5% of timeout set-
1 ns ting
Transition type Minimum transition time = 8.5 ns + 5% of transition
600 ps time setting
Pattern type, typical Minimum time the pattern is 1 ns
true = 1 ns
State type, typical Minimum true time before 1 ns
clock edge = 1 ns
Minimum true time after
clock edge = 1 ns
Setup/Hold type, typical Minimum clock pulse width Minimum clock pulse width
from active edge to inactive from inactive edge to active
edge edge
3 ns + hold time setting 2 ns
Setup and Hold parameters Limits
Setup time (time from data - 100 ns minimum
transition to clock edge) +100 ns maximum
Hold time (time from clock - 1 ns minimum
edge to data transition) +102 ns maximum
Setup time + Hold time +2 ns minimum
(algebraic sum of the two
settings)

1- 14 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Specifications

Table 1- 4: Trigger specifications (Cont.)

Characteristic Description
Advanced trigger timer ranges Limits
Glitch type 1 ns to 1 s
Runt type, time qualified 1 ns to 1 s
Width type 1 ns to 1 s
Timeout type 1 ns to 1 s
Transition type 1 ns to 1 s
Pattern type 1 ns to 1 s
Setup/Hold type Setup and Hold timers Limits
Setup time (time from data - 100 ns to +100 ns
transition to clock edge)
Hold time (time from clock - 1 ns to +100 ns
edge to data transition)
Setup time + Hold time +2 ns
(algebraic sum of the two
settings)
n Advanced trigger timer accuracy For Glitch, Timeout, or Width types
Time range Accuracy
1 ns to 500 ns ±(20% of setting + 0.5 ns)
520 ns to 1 s ±(0.01% of setting +
100 ns)
Trigger holdoff range 250 ns to 12 s,
minimum resolution is 8 ns for settings ≤1.2 ms

Table 1- 5: Display specifications

Characteristic Description
Display type 211.2 mm (W)× 158.4 mm (H), 264 mm (10.4 in)
diagonal, liquid crystal active-matrix color display
Display resolution 640 horizontal × 480 vertical pixels
Pixel pitch 0.33 mm horizontal, 0.22 mm vertical
Contrast ratio, typical 150:1
Response time, typical 50 ms, black to white
Display refresh rate 59.94 frames per second
Displayed intensity levels Supports Windows SVGA high-color mode (16-bit)

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 1- 15

Specifications

Table 1- 6: Input/output port specifications

Characteristic Description
n Probe Compensator Output Front-panel BNC connector, requires Probe Cal Deskew
Fixture for probe attachment
Output voltage Frequency
1.0 V (from base to top) ± 1 kHz ± 5%
1.0% into a ≥ 50 Ω load
Note: During probe calibra-
tion only, a relay switches a
DC calibration voltage to
this output in place of the
1kHz square wave. This
voltage varies from - 10 V
to +10 V with a source
impedance less than 1 W
and short circuit current as
high as 300 mA.
n Analog Signal Output amplitude Front-panel BNC connector, provides a buffered version of
the signal that is attached to the channel 3 input
20 mV/div ± 20% into a 1 MΩ load
10 mV/div ± 20% into a 50 Ω load
Analog Signal Output bandwidth, 100 MHz into a 50 Ω load
typical
n Auxiliary Output levels Front-panel BNC connector, provides a TTL-compatible
pulse (polarity selectable) for each A or B trigger
(selectable)
Vout high Vout low (true)
≥2.5 V into open circuit, ≤0.7 V with ≤4 ma sink,
≥1.0 V into 50 Ω load ≤0.25 V into 50 Ω load
Auxiliary Output pulse width, typical Pulse width varies, 1 s minimum
External reference Run SPC whenever the external reference is more than
2000 ppm different than the internal reference or the
reference at which SPC was last run.
Frequency range 9.8 MHz to 10.2 MHz.
n Input sensitivity ≥200 mVp-p
Input voltage, maximum 7 Vp-p
Input impedance 1.5 kΩ, 40 pF. Measure impedance at >100 kHz to make
the blocking capacitor invisible

1- 16 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Specifications

Table 1- 6: Input/output port specifications (Cont.)

Characteristic Description
Internal reference output
Frequency 10 MHz
15 ppm over any ≥1 ms interval. Aging
<1 ppm per year
Output voltage Vout high Vout low (true)
≥2.5 V into open circuit, ≤0.7 V with ≤4 ma sink,
≥1.0 V into 50 Ω load ≤0.25 V into 50 Ω load
Rear-panel I/O ports Ports located on the rear panel
Parallel port (IEEE 1284) DB-25 connector, supports the following modes:
-standard (output only)
bidirectional (PS-2 compatible)
bidirectional enhanced parallel port (IEEE 1284
standard, mode 1 or mode 2, v 1.7)
-bidirectional high-speed extended capabilities
Audio ports Miniature phone jacks for stereo microphone input and
stereo line output
USB port Allows connection or disconnection of USB keyboard
and/or mouse while instrument power is on
Keyboard port PS-2 compatible, instrument power must be off to make
connection
Mouse port PS-2 compatible, instrument power must be off to make
connection
LAN port RJ-45 connector, supports 10 base-T and 100 base-T
Serial port DB-9 COM1 port, uses NS16C550-compatible UARTS,
transfer speeds up to 115.2 kb/s
SVGA video port Upper video port, DB-15 female connector, connect a
second monitor to use dual-monitor display mode,
supports Basic requirements of PC99 specifications
GPIB port IEEE 488.2 standard interface
Scope VGA video port Lower video port, DB-15 female connector, 31.6 kHz
sync, EIA RS-343A compliant, connect to show the
instrument display, including live waveforms, on an
external monitor

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 1- 17

Specifications

Table 1- 7: Data storage specifications

Characteristic Description
CD-RW or CD-ROM Rear-panel CD-RW or CD-ROM drive
Floppy disk Front-panel 3.5 in floppy disk drive, 1.44 MB capacity
Hard disk Rear-panel, removeable hard disk drive, ≥ 20 GB capacity
Nonvolatile memory, typical Up to two 50,000 point waveforms can be stored
Nonvolatile memory retention time, ≥ 5 years
typical
Windows memory 512 MB

Table 1- 8: Power source specifications

Characteristic Description
Source voltage and frequency 100 to 240 V
10%, 50 Hz to 60 Hz
115 V
10%, 400 Hz
Power consumption ≤600 Watts (900 VA)
Overvoltage Category Overvoltage Category II (as defined in IEC 1010-1,
Annex J)
Fuse rating Either one of the following sizes can be used, each size
requires a different fuse cap. Both fuses must be the
same type
0.25 in × 1.25 in size UL198G and CSA C22.2, No. 59, fast acting: 8 A, 250 V
(Tektronix part number 159-0046-00, Bussman ABC-8,
Littelfuse 314008)
5 mm × 20 mm size IEC127, sheet 1, fast acting “F”, high breaking capacity:
6.3 A, 250 V (Bussman GDA 6.3, Littelfuse 21606.3)

1- 18 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Specifications

Table 1- 9: Mechanical specifications

Characteristic Description
Weight
Benchtop configuration 39 lbs (18 kg) instrument only
42 lbs (19 kg) with fully accessorized pouch
86 lbs (39 kg) when packaged for domestic shipment
Rackmount kit 5 lbs (2.3 kg) rackmount conversion kit
8 lbs (3.6 kg) kit packaged for domestic shipment
Dimensions
Benchtop configuration 10.9 in (277 mm) height,
13 in (330 mm) with feet extended
17.9 in (455 mm) width
16.8 in (425 mm) depth
Rackmount configuration 10.5 in (267 mm) height
(Option 1R) 19 in (483 mm) width
22 in (559 mm) depth
Cooling Fan-forced air circulation with no air filter.
Required clearances Top 0 in (0 mm)
Bottom 0.75 in minimum or
0 in (0 mm) when standing
on the feet
Left side 3 in (76 mm)
Right side 3 in (76 mm)
Front 0 in (0 mm)
Rear 0 in (0 mm)
Construction material Chassis parts are constructed of aluminum alloy, front
panel is constructed of plastic laminate, circuit boards are
constructed of glass laminate, outer shell is molded and
textured from a polycarbonate/ABS blend

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 1- 19

Specifications

Table 1- 10: Environmental specifications

Characteristic Description
Temperature, operating 0 °C to +50 °C (32 °F to +122 °F), excluding floppy disk
and CD-ROM drives
+10 °C to +45 °C (50 °F to +113 °F), including floppy disk
and CD-ROM drives
Nonoperating - 22 °C to +60 °C (71 °F to +140 °F)
Humidity, operating 20% to 80% relative humidity with a maximum wet bulb
temperature of +29 °C (+84 °F) at or below +50 °C
(+122 °F), noncondensing
Upper limit derated to 25% relative humidity at +50 °C
(+122 °F)
Nonoperating With no diskette in floppy disk drive
5% to 90% relative humidity with a maximum wet bulb
temperature of +29 °C (+84 °F) at or below +60 °C
(+140 °F), noncondensing
Upper limit derated to 20% relative humidity at +60 °C
(+140 °F)
Altitude, operating 10,000 ft (3,048 m)
Nonoperating 40,000 ft (12,190 m)
Random vibration, operating 0.22 gRMS from 5 Hz to 500 Hz, 10 minutes on each axis,
3 axis, 30 minutes total, with floppy disk and/or CD-ROM
installed
Nonoperating 2.28 gRMS from 5 Hz to 500 Hz, 10 minutes on each axis,
3 axis, 30 minutes total

1- 20 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Specifications

Table 1- 11: Certifications and compliances

Category Standards or description

EC Declaration of Conformity - Meets intent of Directive 89/336/EEC for Electromagnetic Compatibility. Compliance was
EMC demonstrated to the following specifications as listed in the Official Journal of the European Union:
EN 61326 Emissions 1, 3 Class A Radiated and Conducted Emissions
EN 61326 Immunity 1,2,4
IEC 1000-4-2 Electrostatic Discharge Immunity
±4 kV contact discharge, ±8 kV air discharge,
performance criterion B
IEC 1000-4-3 RF field immunity
3 V/m, 80 MHz to 1 GHz,
80% amplitude modulated with a 1 kHz sinewave
performance criterion A
IEC 1000-4-4 Electrical Fast Transient/Burst Immunity
1 kV on AC mains, 500 V on I/O cables, performance criterion B
IEC 1000-4-5 AC Surge Immunity
1 kV differential mode, 2 kV common mode,
performance criterion B
IEC 1000-4-6 RF Conducted Immunity
3 V, 150 kHz to 80 MHz, amplitude modulated with a
1 kHz sinewave, performance criterion A
IEC 1000-4-11 AC Mains Voltage Dips and Interruption Immunity
100% reduction for one cycle, performance criterion B
EN 61000-3-2 Power Harmonic Current Emissions
1 If interconnect cables are used, they must be low-EMI shielded cables such as the following
Tektronix part numbers or their equivalents: 012-0991-01, 012-0991-02 or 012-0991-03 GPIB
Cable; 012-1213-00 (or CA part number 0294-9) RS-232 Cable; 012-1214-00 Centronics
Cable; or LCOM part number CTL3VGAMM-5 VGA Cable.
2 The performance criteria for when the instrument is subjected to the conditions described
above are defined as follows:
A — ≤0.2 division waveform displacement or ≤0.4 division increase in peak-to-peak noise
B — temporary, self-recoverable degradation or loss of performance is allowed, but no change
of actual operating state or loss of stored data is allowed
C — temporary loss of function is allowed provided that the function is self recoverable or can
be restored by the operation of the controls
3 Radiated emissions may exceed the levels specified in EN 61326 when this instrument is
connected to a test object.
4 USB mouse and keyboard only, performance criterion C. Normal USB keyboard or mouse
operation can be restored by unplugging and reconnecting the USB connector to the
instrument.
FCC Radiated and conducted emissions do not exceed the levels specified in FCC47 CFR, Part 15,
Subpart B, for Class A equipment.

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 1- 21

Specifications

Table 1- 11: Certifications and compliances (cont.)

Category Standards or description

EC Declaration of Conformity - Compliance was demonstrated to the following specification as listed in the Official Journal of the
Low Voltage European Union:
Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC, amended by 93/68/EEC
EN 61010-1/A2:1995 Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement
control and laboratory use.
U.S. Nationally Recognized UL3111-1, First Edition Standard for electrical measuring and test equipment.
Testing Laboratory Listing
Canadian Certification CAN/CSA C22.2, Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement,
No. 1010.1-92 control, and laboratory use.
Additional Compliance IEC61010-1 Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement,
control, and laboratory use.
Installation (Overvoltage) Terminals on this product may have different installation (overvoltage) category designations. The
Category Definition installation categories are:
CAT III Distribution-level mains (usually permanently connected). Equipment at this level is
typically in a fixed industrial location.
CAT II Local-level mains (wall sockets). Equipment at this level includes appliances, portable
tools, and similar products. Equipment is usually cord-connected.
CAT I Secondary (signal level) or battery operated circuits of electronic equipment.
Pollution Degree Definition A measure of the contaminates that could occur in the environment around and within a product.
Typically the internal environment inside a product is considered to be the same as the external.
Products should be used only in the environment for which they are rated.
Pollution Degree 2 Normally only dry, nonconductive pollution occurs. Occasionally a
temporary conductivity that is caused by condensation must be
expected. This location is a typical office/home environment.
Temporary condensation occurs only when the product is out of
service.
Safety Certification Compliance
Equipment Type Test and measuring
Safety Class Class 1 (as defined in IEC 1010-1, Annex H) - grounded product
Pollution Degree Pollution Degree 2 (as defined in IEC 1010-1). Note: Rated for indoor use only.

1- 22 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

Operating Information

This chapter covers installation information and basic operation instructions.

Installation
The basic operating software is already installed on the hard disk. Refer to
Software Installation on page 2--6 for instructions on reinstalling the software.

CAUTION. Be sure you have an emergency startup disk. You will need this disk if
you ever have to reinstall the Windows operating system. Refer to Create an
Emergency Startup Disk on page 2--5.

Before You Start Verify that all parts and accessories for the oscilloscope are available. Use the
graphical packing list that came with the oscilloscope to determine the necessary
parts and accessories. You should also verify that the following items are
available:
H the correct power cords
H the product--software CD set that includes installation copies of the software
installed on the oscilloscope
H all the accessories necessary to operate the oscilloscope

Environmental The oscilloscope is designed to operate on a bench or on a cart in the normal

Considerations position (on the bottom feet). For proper cooling, at least three inches (7.62 cm)
of clearance is required on both sides of the oscilloscope, and the bottom
requires the clearance provided by the oscilloscope feet.
If you operate the oscilloscope while it is resting on the rear feet, make sure that
you properly route any cables coming out of the rear of the oscilloscope to avoid
damaging them.

CAUTION. Keep the bottom and sides of the oscilloscope clear of obstructions to
ensure proper cooling.

Tables 1--8 and 1--10 on pages 1--18 and 1--20 list the operating requirements for
the oscilloscope. Power source, temperature, humidity, and altitude are listed.

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 2- 1

Operating Information

Connect the Peripherals The peripheral connections are the same as those you would make on a personal
computer. The connection points are shown in Figure 2--1 on page 2--3. See
Table 2--1 for additional connection information.

Table 2- 1: Additional accessory connection information

Item Description
Monitor If you use a nonstandard monitor, you may need to change the
the display settings to achieve the proper resolution for your
monitor.
Printer Connect the printer to the EPP (enhanced parallel port)
connector directly. If your printer has a DB-25 connector, use
the adapter cable that came with your printer to connect to the
EPP connector. For information on printer usage, see Printing
Waveforms in your user oscilloscope manual.
Rackmount Refer to the TDS7000 Rackmount Installation Instructions for
information on installing the rackmount kit.
Other Refer to the Application release notes on your product CD set
for possible additional accessory installation information not
covered in this manual.

2- 2 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Operating Information

WARNING. Before installing accessories to connectors (mouse, keyboard, etc.),

power down the oscilloscope. See Powering Off the Oscilloscope on page 2--5.

Description Icon/Label Locations

Monitor (PC only, for
dual display
operation) . . . . . .

Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS-232 . . . . . . . . . .

Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Audio line out . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Audio line in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CD-ROM drive . . . . . . . . . .

GPIB . . . . . . . .
Oscilloscope monitor
(large-screen
oscilloscope display). . .

Card Slot . . . . . .

Figure 2- 1: Locations of peripheral connectors on rear panel

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 2- 3

Operating Information

Power On the Instrument Follow these steps to power on the instrument.

1. Check that the line fuses are correct for your application. Both fuses must be
the same rating and type. Fuse types require an unique cap and fuseholder.
See Table 2--2 and Figure 2--2.

Table 2- 2: Line fuses

Cap & fuseholder

Fuse type Rating Fuse part number part number
0.25 x 1.250 inch 8 A, fast blow, 250 V 159-0046-00 200-2264-00
5 x 20 mm 6.3 A, fast blow, 250 V 159-0381-00 200-2265-00

Power switch Fuses AC power

Figure 2- 2: Line fuse and power cord connector locations, rear panel

CAUTION. Connect the keyboard, mouse, and other accessories before applying
power to the product.

2. Connect the power cord.

3. If you have an external monitor, connect the power cord and power on the
monitor.
4. Turn the Power switch on at the rear panel. (See Figure 2--2 for switch
location.)
5. If the oscilloscope does not power on, press the On/Standby switch to power
on the instrument (see Figure 2--3 for the switch location).
6. Wait for the boot routine and low-level self test to complete.

2- 4 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Operating Information

Switch

Figure 2- 3: On/Standby switch location

Powering Off the The oscilloscope has a built-in soft power-off function that safely powers off the
Oscilloscope oscilloscope when you press the On/Standby switch.
To completely remove power to the instrument, perform the shutdown just
described, and then set the power switch on the rear panel to off.

Create an Emergency Now that you have completed the basic installation process, you should create an
Startup Disk emergency startup disk that you can use to restart your instrument in case of a
major hardware or software failure. You should create this disk, and then store it
in a safe place.

CAUTION. Create this disk and store it in a safe place. It may allow you to
recover your Windows installation without rebuilding the entire instrument hard
disk.

The emergency startup disk contains basic files to restart your instrument. It also
contains files to check and format the hard disk.
Follow these steps to create the emergency startup disk:
1. Minimize the oscilloscope application by selecting Minimize from the File
menu.
2. Select the Windows Start button, point to Settings, and then click Control
Panel.
3. In the Control Panel, double-click Add/Remove Programs.
4. Click the Startup Disk tab.
5. Insert a floppy disk into the disk drive and follow the on-screen instructions
to create the startup disk.

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 2- 5

Operating Information

Software Installation This section describes how to install the system software found on the product-
software CD that accompanies this product. The instrument ships with the
product software installed, so only perform these procedures if reinstallation
becomes necessary.

Software Release Notes. Read the software release notes README.TXT ASCII
file on the product-software CD before performing installation procedures. This
file contains additional installation and operation information that supercedes
other product documentation.
To view the README.TXT file, open the Notepad Windows accessory and open
the file on the product-software CD. After installation, you can also read the
copy from a directory on the product:
C:\Program Files\TekScope\ReadMe.txt

Operating System Restoration. Use the procedure that accompanies your

Operating System Restore CD should reinstalling system software become
necessary.
The compact disc contains the files necessary to restore the Windows operating
system and necessary drivers for the oscilloscope.
The Windows operating system and drivers are factory installed on the
oscilloscope hard disk. The compact disc serves as a backup in the event that you
have to rebuild the hard drive. You must restore the Windows operating system
before you can install the oscilloscope firmware and other product software.

Application Installation. Use the procedures that accompany your Product

Software CD should reinstalling the oscilloscope application software become
necessary.

The compact disc contains the files necessary to restore the oscilloscope
application and other software for the oscilloscope.

2- 6 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Operating Information

Operating Information
This section covers basic operation information so that you can operate and
prepare to service the instrument.

Back Up User Files You should always back up your user files on a regular basis. Use the Microsoft
Back Up tool to back up files stored on the hard disk. The Back Up tool is
located in the System Tools folder in the Accessories folder.
1. Minimize the oscilloscope application by selecting Minimize from the File
menu.
2. Select the Windows Start button, point to Programs, Accessories, System
Tools, and then click Backup.
3. Use the Microsoft Backup tool to select your backup media and to select the
files and folders that you want to back up. Use the online help for informa-
tion on using the Backup tool. You can back up to the floppy drive, or to a
third-party storage device over the printer port (rear panel).

User Interface Map This section shows the main parts of the user interface.
The following illustration shows the oscilloscope in the Menu bar mode. All
features of the oscilloscope can be accessed through the menus using a mouse or
the touch screen.
When the oscilloscope is in the Tool bar mode, most of the control windows can
be accessed by touching buttons at the top of the display.

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 2- 7

Operating Information

Menu Bar: Access to data I/O,

printing, online help system, and
oscilloscope functions here

Status Bar: Display of

acquisition status, mode, and
number of acquisitions; trigger
status; date; and time
Buttons/Menu. Touch to
toggle between tool-bar
and menu-bar modes
Multipurpose Knob
Readouts. Adjust
parameters controlled by
Display: Live, reference, & math multipurpose knobs
waveforms display here, along Readouts: Display
with cursors cursor readouts and
measurement
readouts in this area,
Waveform Handle: Touch and drag selectable from the
to change vertical position of menu bar or tool bar
waveform. Touch the handle and
change the position and scale using If a control menu is
the multipurpose knobs displayed, these
Controls Status: Quick reference to readouts move to the
vertical, horizontal, and trigger graticule area
selections, scale, and parameters

2- 8 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Operating Information

Front Panel Controls Map Many of the oscilloscope functions can be controlled directly from the front
panel controls or in conjunction with the touch-screen interface.

Use these buttons to start and stop acquisition or start a single

acquisition sequence. The ARM, READY, and TRIG’D lights
show the acquisition status.

Turn knob to adjust waveform intensity.

Press button to turn Fast Acquisition on or off.

Use these knobs and buttons to set the trigger parameters. Push
ADVANCED to display additional trigger functions.

Press to turn cursors on or off.

Press to make a hard copy.
Press to return settings to default values.
Horizontally scale, position, delay, and set record length
(resolution) of selected waveform.

Press to automatically set up the vertical, horizontal, and trigger

controls based on selected channels.

Turn the multipurpose knobs to adjust parameters selected from

the screen interface. Press a Fine button to toggle between
normal and fine adjustment with its multipurpose knob.

Press to turn the touch screen on and off.

Press ZOOM to add a magnified graticule to the display. Press
HORIZ or VERT to select the axis to magnify.

Turn channel displays on and off. Vertically scale, position, or

change the input termination.

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 2- 9

Operating Information

Front Panel I/O Map The following illustration shows the input/output connectors and floppy disk
drive location.

Floppy disk drive

Auxiliary trigger input Ground terminal

Auxiliary
trigger output
Probe Channel
CH 3 SIGNAL compensation inputs
OUTPUT; scale and output
offset controlled by
CH3 controls

Instrument Diagnostics Do the following steps to verify the instrument passes the internal diagnostics.
1. Display the diagnostics menu:
H If the oscilloscope is in tool bar mode, touch the MENU button to put
the oscilloscope into the menu bar mode.
H Select Instrument Diagnostics . . . .from the Utility menu.
2. Run the diagnostics.
H First disconnect any input signals from all four channels.
H Touch the Run button in the diagnostics control window.
3. Wait for the diagnostics to complete.
The internal diagnostics do an exhaustive verification of proper
oscilloscope function. This verification may take several minutes to
complete. When the verification is finished, the resulting status will
appear in the diagnostics control window.
4. Verify that no failures are found.

Signal Path Compensation Run the Signal Path Compensation.

1. Select Instrument Calibration . . . from the Utility menu.

2- 10 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Operating Information

2. Verify that the instrument has had a twenty-minute warm-up before

continuing.
3. Touch the Calibrate button to start the routine.
4. Wait for the test to complete (the test may take several minutes to complete).

5. Verify that the word Pass appears under the Status label in the control
window.

Using the Online Help The user manual represents only part of the assistance available to you — the
online help system, integrated as part of the oscilloscope user interface, provides
quick-to-access support for operating this oscilloscope.
Two types of online help are available, the oscilloscope online help and the
GPIB online programmer’s help. The oscilloscope online help provides
information on all of the oscilloscope controls and procedures for doing typical
tasks. The GPIB online programmer’s help is normally installed on a remote PC
and provides information for controlling the oscilloscope via the GPIB. This
section mainly discusses the online help for the oscilloscope.

Accessing Help in the Tool Bar Mode. When the oscilloscope is in the tool bar
mode, touch the Help button in the upper right corner of the screen to display
help on whatever control window is displayed. From within the Help window,
you can access other help through tabs, links, or buttons. You can also touch the
Help Topics button to display the standard Windows Contents, Index, and Find
tabs.

Accessing Help in the Menu Bar Mode. When the oscilloscope is in the menu bar
mode, you can access the help system from the drop-down help menu. Select
Help on Window to display help on the current control window. Select Contents
and Index to display the standard Windows Contents, Index, and Find tabs. You
can also select other topics from the Help menu such as information on Technical
Support or product specifications.

Moving the Help Topics to View the Oscilloscope Display. You may temporarily
move any displayed help out of the way while you change control window
settings. Touch the Minimize button in the help window to shrink the help
window to a button that displays in the upper right corner of the display (with
the label Restore Help). Touch the Restore Help button to restore the help
window to its normal size.

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 2- 11

Operating Information

2- 12 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

Theory of Operation

This section describes the electrical operation of the oscilloscope. Figure 9--1 on
page 9--2 shows the module interconnections.

Logic Conventions
The oscilloscope contains many digital logic circuits. This manual refers to these
circuits with standard logic symbols and terms. Unless otherwise stated, all logic
functions are described using the positive-logic convention: the more positive of
the two logic levels is the high (1) state, and the more negative level is the low
(0) state. Signal states may also be described as “true” meaning their active state
or “false” meaning their nonactive state. The specific voltages that constitute a
high or low state vary among the electronic devices.

Module Overviews
Module overviews describes the basic operation of each functional circuit block
as shown in Figure 9--1 on page 9--2.

General A dual-processor system controls the oscilloscope. The oscilloscope features a

VGA resolution flat-panel display, a transparent touch screen, and a front-panel
with direct access to commonly used oscilloscope functions. You can also use
the oscilloscope with a mouse pointing device or keyboard.

Input Signal Path A signal enters the oscilloscope through a direct coaxial connection to the input
connector, or a probe connected to the front panel.

Acquisition Board. The acquisition board conditions the input signals, samples
them, converts them to digital signals, and controls the acquisition process under
direction of the processor system. The acquisition system includes the multi-
source trigger, acquisition timebase, and acquisition mode generation and control
circuitry. The acquisition board is located in the bottom compartment of the
oscilloscope. Four vertical channels are accommodated. All channels feature a
Tekprobe Level 2 interface for additional front-end signal conditioning functions
like high input-impedance real-time probes.

Processor System. The processor system contains two processor boards with
microprocessors that control the entire oscilloscope. The basic configuration
supports four input channels labeled Ch 1 through Ch 4, provides an external

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 3- 1

Theory of Operation

trigger input, a trigger output, a Ch 3 signal output, and a probe compensation

output.
Each acquisition channel is equipped with a processor that uses its own host
interface to interface to the GCS which in turn communicates with the command
interface processor over the multiplexed address/data nibble bus.

Display Panel Waveforms and menus are displayed on a 10.4 inch, color, active-matrix LCD
display with touch panel.

Display System. Text and waveforms are processed by different parts of the
display circuitry. The display system (display adapter board and inverter board)
sends the text and waveform information to the display panel.

Touch Panel. The display board sends information from the touch panel to the
processor. Any changes in settings are reported to the processor system.

Front Panel The NLX board reads the front-panel switches and encoders. Any changes in
their settings are reported to the processor system. The NLX board also turns the
LEDs on and off.

Menu Switches. Front-panel menu switches are also read by the NLX board. The
touch screen processor sends any changes in menu selections to the NLX
processor system. The ON/STBY switch passes through the CPU board to the
NLX board. The NLX board creates the signal sent to the power supply to toggle
power.

Floppy Drive. The floppy drive provides access to stored waveform data and
software to customize your oscilloscope.

CPU Board. The CPU board provides fast access to the Acquisition board and the
display system. The NLX board reads the front-panel switches and encoders and
implements any changes requested by their settings. The CPU board provides a
GPIB interface through a rear panel connector.

NLX Board. The NLX board provides standard Windows functionality and I/O
port interfaces to the rear panel.

NLX Riser Board. Both processor systems, the floppy drive, CD-ROM drive, and
hard drive are connected together by, and communicate through, the riser board.

3- 2 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Theory of Operation

Rear Panel The hard drive and CD drive provide access to stored waveform data and
software to customize your oscilloscope with your measurement needs. The
GPIB allows for external control of the oscilloscope.
You can make hardcopies on the GPIB, RS-232, and Centronics ports. Another
port from the CPU board: cal adjust lock.
The NLX board has one USB port and one serial port on the rear panel. The
NLX has 2 USB channels, but one is used internally, routed to the riser board,
and is not available for use. The NLX has one serial port, which is routed to the
rear panel. A microphone input and earphone output exist on the NLX rear panel.
Ethernet connector is RJ-45. Keyboard and mouse are both PS/2.

Low Voltage Power Supply The low voltage power supply is a switching power converter with active power
factor control. It supplies power to all of the circuitry in the oscilloscope.
The principal POWER switch, located on the rear panel, controls all power to
the oscilloscope including the Low Voltage Power Supply. The ON/STBY
switch, located on the front panel, also controls all of the power to the
oscilloscope except for part of the circuitry in the standby power supply.
The power supply sends a power fail (~PF) warning to the processor system if
the power is going down.
Power is distributed throughout the oscilloscope through the front and rear power
distribution bus boards.

Fans The fan assembly provides forced air cooling for the oscilloscope. The fans are
controlled by the CPU and microprocessor.

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 3- 3

Theory of Operation

3- 4 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

Performance Verification

Two types of Performance Verification procedures can be performed on this

product: Brief Procedures and Performance Tests. You may not need to perform
all of these procedures, depending on what you want to accomplish.

H To rapidly confirm that the oscilloscope functions and was adjusted properly,
just do the brief procedures under Self Tests, which begin on page 4--5.
Advantages: These procedures are quick to do, require no external
equipment or signal sources, and perform extensive functional and accuracy
testing to provide high confidence that the oscilloscope will perform
properly. They can be used as a quick check before making a series of
important measurements.
H To further check functionality, first do the Self Tests just mentioned; then do
the brief procedures under Functional Tests that begin on page 4--6.
Advantages: These procedures require minimal additional time to perform,
require no additional equipment other than a BNC cable, and more complete-
ly test the internal hardware of the oscilloscope. They can be used to quickly
determine if the oscilloscope is suitable for putting into service, such as
when it is first received.
H If more extensive confirmation of performance is desired, do the Perform-
ance Tests — Semi-Automated Method, beginning on page 4--17, after doing
the Functional and Self Tests mentioned above.
Advantages: These procedures add direct checking of the warranted
specifications that are marked with the n symbol. These procedures are
fairly quick to execute but require specific test equipment. (See Table 4--1:
Required equipment and materials on page 4--17).
If you are not familiar with operating this oscilloscope, read the oscilloscope
reference or user manuals or explore the online help.

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 4- 1

Performance Verification

Conventions
Throughout these procedures the following conventions apply:
H Each test procedure uses the following general format:

Title of Test
Equipment Required
Prerequisites

Procedure
H Each procedure consists of as many steps, substeps, and subparts as required
to do the test. Steps, substeps, and subparts are sequenced as follows:
1. First Step
a. First Substep
H First Subpart
H Second Subpart
b. Second Substep
2. Second Step
H In steps and substeps, the lead-in statement in italics instructs you what to
do, while the instructions that follow tell you how to do it, as in the example
step below:
Initialize the oscilloscope: Push the front-panel DEFAULT SETUP button.
H Where instructed to use a control in the display or a front-panel button or
knob, the name of the control, button, or knob appears in boldface type.
Where instructed to make or verify a setting, the value of the setting also
appears in boldface type.

STOP. The STOP notation at the left is accompanied by information you must read
to do the procedure properly.

H The term “toolbar” refers to a row of buttons at the top of the display. The
term “menu bar” refers to a row of menus at the top of the display. You can
switch between toolbar and menu bar operating modes by pushing the button
near the top right corner of the display. See Figure 4--1.

4- 2 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Performance Verification

Toolbar

Click here to change to

menu bar mode

Menu bar

Click here to change to

touch bar mode

Figure 4- 1: Toolbar and menu bar

H The procedures assume you have connected a mouse to the oscilloscope so

you can click on the screen controls. If you have not connected a mouse, you
can use the touch screen to operate all the screen controls.

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 4- 3

Performance Verification

4- 4 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

Brief Procedures

The Self Tests use internal routines to confirm basic functionality and proper
adjustment. No test equipment is required to do these test procedures.

The Functional Tests utilize the probe-compensation output at the front panel as
a test-signal source for further verifying that the oscilloscope functions properly.
A BNC cable is required to do these test procedures.

Self Tests
This procedure uses internal routines to verify that the oscilloscope functions and
was adjusted properly. No test equipment or hookups are required.

Verify Internal Adjustment, Equipment None

Self Compensation, and required
Diagnostics Prerequisites Power on the oscilloscope and allow a 20 minute warm-up before doing
this procedure.

1. Verify that internal diagnostics pass: Do the following substeps to verify

passing of internal diagnostics.
a. Display the System diagnostics menu:
H If the oscilloscope is in toolbar mode, click the MENU button to put
the oscilloscope into menu bar mode.
H Pull down the Utility menu and select Instrument Diagnostics. . . .
This displays the diagnostics control window.
b. Run the System Diagnostics:

H First disconnect any input signals from all four channels.

H Click the Run button in the diagnostics control window.
c. Wait: The internal diagnostics do an exhaustive verification of proper
oscilloscope function. This verification may take several minutes. When
the verification is finished, the resulting status will appear in the
diagnostics control window.

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 4- 5

Brief Procedures

NOTE. If diagnostic error message 531 is displayed, run signal-path compensa-

tion and then rerun Instrument Diagnostics.

d. Verify that no failures are found and reported on-screen. All tests should
pass.
e. Run the signal-path compensation routine:
H Pull down the Utilities menu and select Instrument Calibra-
tion. . . . This displays the instrument calibration control window.

H If required because the oscilloscope is in service mode, select the

Signal Path button under Calibration Area.
H Click the Calibrate button to start the routine.
f. Wait: Signal-path compensation may take five to fifteen minutes to run.
g. Confirm signal-path compensation returns passed status: Verify that the
word Pass appears in the instrument calibration control window.
2. Return to regular service: Click the Close button to exit the instrument
calibration control window.

Functional Tests
The purpose of these procedures is to confirm that the oscilloscope functions
properly. The only equipment required is a BNC cable and, to check the file
system, a 3.5 inch, 720 K or 1.44 Mbyte, formatted floppy disk.

STOP. These procedures verify functions; that is, they verify that the oscilloscope
features operate. They do not verify that they operate within limits.
Therefore, when the instructions in the functional tests that follow call for you to
verify that a signal appears on-screen “that is about five divisions in amplitude”
or “has a period of about six horizontal divisions,” etc., do NOT interpret the
quantities given as limits. Operation within limits is checked in Performance
Tests, which begin on page 4--27.

4- 6 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Brief Procedures

STOP. DO NOT make changes to the front-panel settings that are not called out
in the procedures. Each verification procedure will require you to set the
oscilloscope to certain default settings before verifying functions. If you make
changes to these settings, other than those called out in the procedure, you may
obtain invalid results. In this case, just redo the procedure from step 1.
When you are instructed to press a front-panel or screen button, the button may
already be selected (its label will be highlighted). If this is the case, it is not
necessary to press the button.

Verify All Input Channels Equipment One BNC cable, such as Tektronix part number 012-0076-00
required
Prerequisites None

1. Initialize the oscilloscope: Push the front-panel DEFAULT SETUP button.

2. Hook up the signal source: Connect the BNC cable from the probe com-
pensation output to the channel input that you want to test (beginning with
CH 1) as shown in Figure 4--2.

TDS7000 oscilloscope

BNC cable from PROBE

COMPENSATION output to
channel input

Figure 4- 2: Universal test hookup for functional tests - CH 1 shown

3. Turn off all channels: If any of the front-panel channel buttons are lighted,
push those buttons to turn off the displayed channels. See Figure 4--3.

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 4- 7

Brief Procedures

Channel buttons

Figure 4- 3: Channel button location

4. Select the channel to test: Push the channel button for the channel you are
currently testing. The button lights and the channel display comes on.
5. Set up the oscilloscope: Push the front panel AUTOSET button. This sets
the horizontal and vertical scale for a usable display and sets the trigger
source to the channel you are testing.

6. Verify that the channel is operational: Confirm that the following statements
are true.
H The vertical scale readout for the channel under test shows a setting of
500 mV, and a square-wave probe-compensation signal is displayed
on-screen.
H The front-panel vertical POSITION knob (for the channel you are
testing) moves the signal up and down the screen when rotated.
H Turning the vertical SCALE knob counterclockwise (for the channel you
are testing) decreases the amplitude of the waveform on-screen, turning
the knob clockwise increases the amplitude, and returning the knob to
500 mV returns the amplitude to about 2 divisions.

7. Verify that the channel acquires in all acquisition modes: Pull down the
Horiz/Acq menu to select Horizontal/Acquisition Setup. . . . Click the
Acquisition tab in the control window that displays. Click each of the five
acquisition modes and confirm that the following statements are true.
H Sample mode displays an actively acquiring waveform on-screen. (Note
that there is a small amount of noise present on the square wave).
H Peak Detect mode displays an actively acquiring waveform on-screen
with the noise present in Sample mode “peak detected.”
H Hi Res mode displays an actively acquiring waveform on-screen with the
noise that was present in Sample mode reduced.

4- 8 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Brief Procedures

H Average mode displays an actively acquiring waveform on-screen with

the noise reduced.
H Envelope mode displays an actively acquiring waveform on-screen with
the noise displayed.
H Waveform Database mode (optional) displays an actively acquiring
waveform on-screen that is the accumulation of several acquisitions.
8. Test all channels: Repeat steps 2 through 7 until all four input channels are
verified.
9. Remove the test hookup: Disconnect the BNC cable from the channel input
and the probe compensation output.

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 4- 9

Brief Procedures

Verify the Time Base Equipment One BNC cable, such as Tektronix part number 012-0076-00
required
Prerequisites None

1. Initialize the oscilloscope:Push the front-panel DEFAULT SETUP button.

2. Hook up the signal source: Connect the BNC cable from the probe com-
pensation output to the CH 1 input as shown in Figure 4--4.

TDS7000 oscilloscope

BNC cable from PROBE

COMPENSATION output to
CH 1 input

Figure 4- 4: Setup for time base test

3. Set up the oscilloscope: Push the front panel AUTOSET button.

4. Set the time base: Set the horizontal SCALE to 200
s/div. The time-base
readout is displayed at the bottom of the graticule.

5. Verify that the time base operates: Confirm the following statements.
H One period of the square-wave probe-compensation signal is about five
horizontal divisions on-screen for the 200
s/div horizontal scale setting.
H Rotating the horizontal SCALE knob clockwise expands the waveform
on-screen (more horizontal divisions per waveform period), counter-
clockwise rotation contracts it, and returning the horizontal scale to
200
s/div returns the period to about five divisions.
H The horizontal POSITION knob positions the signal left and right
on-screen when rotated.

6. Verify horizontal delay:

a. Center a rising edge on screen:
H Set the horizontal POSITION knob so that the rising edge where the
waveform is triggered is lined up with the center horizontal
graticule.

4- 10 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Brief Procedures

H Change the horizontal SCALE to 20
s/div. The rising edge of the

waveform should remain near the center graticule and the falling
edge should be off screen.
b. Turn on and set horizontal delay:
H Pull down the Horiz/Acq menu to select Horizontal/Acquisition
Setup. . . .
H Click the Horizontal tab in the control window that displays.
H Click the Delay Mode button to turn delay on.
H Double click the Horiz Delay control in the control window to
display the pop-up keypad. Click the keypad buttons to set the
horizontal delay to 500
s and then click the ENTER key.

c. Verify the waveform: Verify that a falling edge of the waveform is within
a few divisions of center screen.
d. Adjust the horizontal delay: Rotate the upper multipurpose knob to
change the horizontal delay setting. Verify that the falling edge shifts
horizontally. Rotate the front-panel horizontal POSITION knob. Verify
that this knob has the same effect (it also adjusts delay, but only when
delay mode is on).
e. Verify the delay toggle function:
H Rotate the front-panel horizontal POSITION knob to center the
falling edge horizontally on the screen.
H Change the horizontal SCALE to 40 ns/div. The falling edge of the
waveform should remain near the center graticule. If not, readjust the
delay setting to center the falling edge.
H Push the front-panel DELAY button several times to toggle delay off
and on and back off again. Verify that the display switches quickly
between two different points in time (the rising and falling edges of
this signal).
7. Remove the test hookup: Disconnect the BNC cable from the channel input
and the probe compensation output.

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 4- 11

Brief Procedures

Verify the A (Main) and B Equipment One BNC cable, such as Tektronix part number 012-0076-00
(Delayed) Trigger Systems required
Prerequisites None

1. Initialize the oscilloscope: Push the front-panel DEFAULT SETUP button.

2. Hook up the signal source: Connect the BNC cable from the probe com-
pensation output to the CH 1 input as shown in Figure 4--5.

TDS7000 oscilloscope

BNC cable from PROBE

COMPENSATION output to
CH 1 input

Figure 4- 5: Setup for trigger test

3. Set up the oscilloscope: Push the front-panel AUTOSET button.

4. Verify that the main trigger system operates: Confirm that the following
statements are true.

H The trigger level readout for the A (main) trigger system changes with
the trigger-LEVEL knob.
H The trigger-LEVEL knob can trigger and untrigger the square-wave
signal as you rotate it. (Leave the signal untriggered).
H Pushing the front-panel trigger LEVEL knob sets the trigger level to the
50% amplitude point of the signal and triggers the signal that you just
left untriggered. (Leave the signal triggered.)

4- 12 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Brief Procedures

5. Verify that the delayed trigger system operates:

a. Set up the delayed trigger:
H Pull down the Trig menu and select A — B Trigger Sequence. . . .
This displays the A→B Sequence tab of the trigger setup control
window.

H Click the Trig After Time button under A Then B.

H Click the B Trig Level control in the control window.
b. Confirm that the following statements are true:
H The trigger-level readout for the B trigger system changes as you
turn the lower multipurpose knob.
H As you rotate the lower multipurpose knob, the square-wave
probe-compensation signal can become triggered and untriggered.
(Leave the signal triggered.)
c. Verify the delayed trigger counter:
H Double click the Trig Delay control to pop up a numeric keypad for
that control.

H Click on the keypad to enter a trigger delay time of 1 second and

then click Enter.
H Verify that the trigger READY indicator on the front panel flashes
about once every second as the waveform is updated on-screen.
6. Remove the test hookup: Disconnect the BNC cable from the channel input
and the probe compensation output.

Verify the File System Equipment One BNC cable, such as Tektronix part number 012-0076-00
required
One 720 K or 1.44 Mbyte, 3.5 inch DOS-compatible formatted disk.
Prerequisites None

1. Initialize the oscilloscope: Push the front-panel DEFAULT SETUP button.

2. Hook up the signal source: Connect the BNC cable from the probe com-
pensation output to the CH 1 input as shown in Figure 4--6.

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 4- 13

Brief Procedures

TDS7000 oscilloscope

BNC cable from PROBE

COMPENSATION output to
CH 1 input

Figure 4- 6: Setup for the file system test

3. Insert the test disk: Insert the floppy disk in the floppy disk drive.
4. Set up the oscilloscope: Push the front panel AUTOSET button.

5. Set the time base: Set the horizontal SCALE to 1 ms/div. The time-base
readout is displayed at the bottom of the graticule.
6. Save the settings:
a. Pull down the File menu to select Instrument Setup. . . . This displays
the instrument setups control window.
b. Click the Save button under Save settings to file in the control window.
This displays a familiar Windows dialog box for choosing a destination
folder naming the file.
c. In the Save Instrument Setups As dialog box, select the 31/2 Floppy (A:)
icon in the Save in: drop-down list to set the save destination to the
floppy disk.
d. Note the default file name and then click the Save button to save the
setup to the default file name.
7. Change the settings again: Set the horizontal SCALE to 200
s/div.
8. Verify the file system works:
a. Click the Recall Setups tab in the control window.
b. Click the Recall button under Recall settings from file in the control
window. This displays a familiar Windows dialog box for locating the
settings file that you want to recall.
c. In the Recall Save Instrument Setups From dialog box, select the 31/2
Floppy (A:) icon in the Look in: drop-down list.

4- 14 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Brief Procedures

d. Locate and then double click in the dialog box on the setup file that you
previously stored.
e. Verify that the oscilloscope retrieved the saved setup from the disk. Do
this by noticing the horizontal SCALE is again 1 ms and the waveform
shows ten cycles just as it did when you saved the setup.
9. Remove the test hookup:
a. Disconnect the BNC cable from the channel input and the probe
compensation output.
b. Remove the floppy disk from the floppy disk drive.

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 4- 15

Brief Procedures

4- 16 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

Performance Tests — Semi-Automated Method

This chapter describes a semi-automated procedure you can use to verify the
performance of a TDS7000 oscilloscope. The procedure checks all the specifica-
tions that are marked with the n symbol.

This procedure requires the specific test equipment and materials listed in
Table 4--1.

Table 4- 1: Required equipment and materials

Category Specific equipment required Quantity

Signal source Fluke 9500B Oscilloscope Calibrator, with Option 100 1 ea.
(high-stability time base)
Fluke 9520 or 9530 Standard Output Module 5 ea.
Instrument PC-compatible computer with National Instruments 1 ea.
controller GPIB Controller card and National Instruments NI-488.2
(only one of for Windows software, running Windows 95/98 or NT
these configura-
configura
tions required) National Instruments PCMCIA GPIB Controller card for
Windows 98 and National Instruments NI-488.2 for
Windows software (to install in the TDS7000)
National Instruments USB GPIB Controller card for
Windows 98 and National Instruments NI-488.2 for
Windows software (to install in the TDS7000) 1
Test software PVsetup.exe, located on TDS7000 Series Product 1 ea.
Software CD-ROM that is included as standard
equipment with the oscilloscope
GPIB cables GPIB cable, 1 m minimum length, Tektronix part number 2 ea.
002-0991-01 or similar
BNC cable 50 Ω, male-to-male BNC connectors, Tektronix part 1 ea.
number 012-0076-00 or similar
SMA cables 50 Ω, 20 in, male-to-male SMA connectors, Tektronix 2 ea.
part number 174-1427-00
Adapters SMA “T”, male-to-2 SMA female, Tektronix part 1 ea.
number 015-1016-00
SMA female-to-BNC male, Tektronix part number 1 ea.
015-0572-00
BNC male-- to-female elbow, Tektronix part number 1 ea.
103-0031-00

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 4- 17

Performance Tests — Semi-Automated Method

Table 4- 1: Required equipment and materials (Cont.)

Category Specific equipment required Quantity

Terminators Short circuit, SMA female connector, Tektronix part 2 ea
number 015-1021-00
Attenuator Ratio: 2X; impedance 50 Ω; connectors: female BNC 1 ea
input, male BNC output, Tektronix part number
011-0069-02

4- 18 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Performance Tests — Semi-Automated Method

Overview of the Procedure

To perform this procedure you must have the specific equipment listed in
Table 4--1.
After the controller is set up, you need to install the performance verification test
program from the TDS7000 Series Product Software CD-ROM that was shipped
with the oscilloscope. An installer will assist you with the installation of the test
program.
When you start the test program a screen of introductory information is
displayed that contains instructions, a text entry line, and function buttons. You
use these controls to navigate through the steps of the test program. You can
either click (or touch) the function buttons in the screen or use the function keys
on the keyboard. The keyboard is required for text entry.

The procedure is semi automated. Once the program is started, most of the steps
will run without manual intervention; this part takes about 15 minutes. At that
point, the test program stops and gives you instructions for setup changes you
will need to make before the test can proceed. The remainder of the test requires
setup changes for each step. The overall time to complete the test is about 30
minutes. The test sequence is summarized in Table 4--2.
When the test is complete, you can save or print a report that lists the actual
performance of the oscilloscope relative to its specifications. The test report is an
ACSII text file written to the directory C:\tekcats\rpt\. The filename of the
report is <oscilloscope model>.<serial number>. If you run repeated tests
on the same oscilloscope, the results are appended to the end of the existing
report file.

Table 4- 2: Test sequence overview

Step Process or check Comments

1 Check DC voltage measurement Runs unattended after initial setup
accuracy
2 Check analog bandwidth
3 Check channel isolation
4 Check long-term sample rate and delay
time accuracy
5 Check trigger sensitivity
6 Check time accuracy for pulse, glitch,
timeout, and width triggering
7 Characterize signal source outputs 1 Requires manual setup changes
8 Check delay between channels May require manual setup changes
9 Check delta time measurement accuracy Requires manual setup changes

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 4- 19

Performance Tests — Semi-Automated Method

Table 4- 2: Test sequence overview (Cont.)

Step Process or check Comments

10 Check probe calibration output signal Requires manual setup changes
11 Check analog signal output signal Requires manual setup changes
12 Check auxiliary output signal Requires manual setup changes
1 This step is performed only if the configuration of the Fluke 9500B signal source and
the Fluke 9520 output modules has changed since the signal-source system was last
characterized, or if the last characterization occurred more than one month ago. If
not required, this step is automatically skipped.

Initial Instrumentation Setup

Before you can execute the test program, you need to set up and configure the
instrumentation. Make connections according to Figure 4--7.

GPIB cables daisy chained onto

oscilloscope GPIB connector

GPIB cable GPIB cable

TDS7000 oscilloscope
Controller

Fluke 9500B

Connect Fluke 9520 or 9530 output

modules to oscilloscope CH1 through
CH 4 inputs and AUX IN as shown

Figure 4- 7: Initial setup

4- 20 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Performance Tests — Semi-Automated Method

Once the connections have been made, follow these steps:

1. Power on the instruments: Turn power for the controller, oscilloscope, and
signal source on. The oscilloscope and the signal source must warm up for
20 minutes before you can begin to execute the test. However, while you are
waiting you can continue with the next steps in this procedure.
2. Check the Fluke 9500B GPIB address: Refer to the Fluke 9500B documenta-
tion for information about setting the GPIB address. If the address is set to 0
or 1, change it to an address between 2 and 30 (inclusive). Make a note of
the address setting for use later in this procedure.
3. Set the GPIB address of the oscilloscope.

a. If the oscilloscope powered on in the toolbar mode (the default mode),

click the Menu button (upper right corner of the display) to put the
oscilloscope in menu-bar mode. In menu-bar mode, you should see a
PC-style menu bar across the top of the display.
b. Pull down the Utility menu and then select GPIB Configuration. . . .
This command will display the GPIB Configuration control window.
c. In the GPIB Configuration control window, click the Talk/Listen button
to select Talk/Listen mode.
d. Touch the Address readout and then click the up and down arrows or the
upper multipurpose knob to set the GPIB address to 1.
e. Click the Close button to close the control window.

NOTE. If you are using a separate PC as the controller, do step 4 and its
substeps. If you are using the oscilloscope as the controller, do step 6 and its
substeps, starting on page 5--6.

4. Configure the controller: Use the GPIB software and hardware on the
controller as necessary to make the following settings:
a. Set the controller GPIB address to 0.
b. Define GPIB devices and their addresses for compatibility with the test
program as shown in Table 4--3.

Table 4- 3: GPIB devices required by test

program

Device name GPIB address

<controller> 0
DUT1 1

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 4- 21

Performance Tests — Semi-Automated Method

Table 4- 3: GPIB devices required by test

program (Cont.)

Device name GPIB address

SG1 Set each address to that of
FG1 the Fluke 9500B

AUX1
PS1
PG1
RT1

NOTE. If you see the message “DUT I/O ERROR-->CAN’T OPEN DUT”, the
device names are not correct. The device names in Table 4--3 must be set up in
Windows using the following procedure:

1. From the Start menu, select Settings and then Control Panel.
2. Double click GPIB.
3. In the Device Template window, click on the device name and then click on
Configure.
4. Then, change the name or address as required in Table 4--3.

Test Program Installation

Follow these steps to install the test program on the instrument controller. The
same steps apply whether the instrument controller is a separate PC or the PC
that is built into the oscilloscope. If you are using the PC built into the oscillo-
scope as the controller, this procedure assumes that the GPIB card and accompa-
nying controller software are already installed and configured as necessary.

1. Locate the test program: Locate the TDS7000 Series Product Software
CD-ROM that was shipped with the oscilloscope as a standard accessory and
insert it into the CD-ROM drive on the instrument controller.
2. Start the installer: Select Run. . . in the Start menu and then enter
E:\Performance Verification\setup.exe (or other appropriate designation
for the CD-ROM drive if it is not the E: drive). (Some PCs and controllers
require quotes around the path.)
3. Follow the instructions: Follow the instructions presented by the installer to
install the test program. The test program directory “tekcats” must be
installed at the root level (typically C:\tekcats\) of your system.

4- 22 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Performance Tests — Semi-Automated Method

Test Program Execution

Once the instrumentation is connected, configured, and has been allowed to
warm up for at least 20 minutes, you can start the test program. To start the test
program, double click the desktop shortcut PV Procedure.
Program execution is a matter of following the on-screen instructions. The test
program contains help screens to provide additional information you may need to
know to execute the tests. When the test program calls for a change of setup, see
Figures 4--8 through 4--13 for specific instructions to make the setup.

NOTE. Even though the controller and GPIB cables are not shown in the
following diagrams, the controller setup and configuration remain unchanged
from the initial setup.

TDS7000 oscilloscope

Connect Fluke 9520 or 9530

output modules to oscilloscope Fluke 9500B
CH 1 and CH 4 inputs as shown

Connect unused output modules

to CH 1 when instructed to do so
by the test program

Figure 4- 8: Setup to characterize signal source outputs

NOTE. After you have completed these tests you must manually peform the
long--term sample rate and delay time accuracy and reference test on page 4--57
to verify the external reference.

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 4- 23

Performance Tests — Semi-Automated Method

TDS7000 oscilloscope

Connect Fluke 9520 or 9530 output

modules to oscilloscope CH1 through Fluke 9500B
CH 4 inputs and AUX IN as shown

Figure 4- 9: Setup to check delay between channels

TDS7000 oscilloscope

SMA female
short 20I 50 Ω cable Connect BNC T to oscilloscope CH 1
2X attenuator

SMA T connector BNC 90° female to

SMA female male adapter
short 20I 50 Ω cable
BNC T
Fluke 9520 output module
connector
BNC to SMA Fluke 9500B
adapter

Leave unused output

modules (not shown)
connected to Fluke 9500B

Figure 4- 10: Setup to check delta time accuracy

4- 24 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Performance Tests — Semi-Automated Method

TDS7000 oscilloscope

BNC cable from PROBE

COMPENSATION output
to CH 1 input

Figure 4- 11: Setup to check probe compensation output

TDS7000 oscilloscope

BNC cable from SIGNAL

OUT to CH 1 input

Figure 4- 12: Setup to check analog signal output

TDS7000 oscilloscope

BNC cable from AUX OUT

to CH 1 input

Figure 4- 13: Setup to check auxiliary output

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 4- 25

Performance Tests — Semi-Automated Method

4- 26 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

Performance Tests

This section contains a collection of manual procedures for checking that the
TDS7000 Series Oscilloscopes perform as warranted.

The procedures are arranged in logical groupings such as: Signal Acquisition
System Checks, Time Base System Checks, Triggering System Checks, and
Output Ports Checks. They check all the characteristics that are designated as
checked in Specifications. (The characteristics that are checked appear with a n
in Specifications).

STOP. These procedures extend the confidence level provided by the basic
procedures described on page 4--5. The basic procedures should be done first,
then these procedures performed if desired.

Prerequisites
The tests in this section comprise an extensive, valid confirmation of perform-
ance and functionality when the following requirements are met:
H The cabinet must be installed on the oscilloscope.
H You must have performed and passed the procedures under Self Tests, found
on page 4--5, and those under Functional Tests, found on page 4--6.
H A signal-path compensation must have been done within the recommended
calibration interval and at a temperature within ±5 _C of the present
operating temperature. (If at the time you did the prerequisite Self Tests, the
temperature was within the limits just stated, consider this prerequisite met).
A signal-path compensation must have been done at an ambient humidity
within 25% of the current ambient humidity and after having been at that
humidity for at least 4 hours.
H The oscilloscope must have been last adjusted at an ambient temperature
between +20 _C and +30 _C, must have been operating for a warm-up
period of at least 20 minutes, and must be operating at an ambient tempera-
ture as listed in Table 1--10. (The warm-up requirement is usually met in the
course of meeting the Self Tests and Functional Tests prerequisites listed
above).

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 4- 27

Performance Tests

Equipment Required
Procedures starting on page 4--35, use external, traceable signal sources to
directly check warranted characteristics. Table 4--4 lists the required equipment.

Table 4- 4: Test equipment

Item number and

description Minimum requirements Example Purpose
1. Attenuator,10X Ratio: 10X; impedance 50 Ω; connec- Tektronix part number Signal Attenuation
(two required) tors: female BNC input, male BNC 011-0059-02
output
2. Attenuator, 5X Ratio: 5X; impedance 50 Ω; connec- Tektronix part number Signal Attenuation
tors: female BNC input, male BNC 011-0060-02
output
3. Terminator, 50 Ω Impedance 50 Ω; connectors: female Tektronix part number Signal Termination for
BNC input, male BNC output 011-0049-01 Channel Delay Test
4. Cable, Precision 50 Ω 50 Ω, 36 in, male-to-male BNC Tektronix part number Signal Interconnection
Coaxial (three required) connectors 012-0482-00
5. Connector, Dual-Banana Female BNC-to-dual banana Tektronix part number Various Accuracy Tests
(two required) 103-0090-00
6. Connector, BNC “T” Male BNC-to-dual female BNC Tektronix part number Checking Trigger Sensitivity
103-0030-00
7. Probe, 10X A P6139A3, P6243, or P6245 probe4 Tektronix part number Signal Interconnection
P6139A or P6245
8. Floppy disk 3.5 inch, 720 K or 1.44 Mbyte, Standard IBM PC-compatible Checking File System Basic
DOS-compatible floppy disk disk Functionality
9. Generator, DC Calibra- Variable amplitude to ±104 V; accura- Fluke 9500B1 Checking DC Offset, Gain,
tion cy to 0.1% and Measurement Accuracy
10. Generator, Calibration 500 mV square wave calibrator Fluke 9500B1 To check accuracy of Signal
amplitude; accuracy to 0.25% Out
11. Generator, Time Mark Variable marker frequency from 10 ms Fluke 9500B1 Checking Sample-Rate and
(optional) to 10 ns; accuracy within 2 ppm Delay-time Accuracy
12. Generator, Sine Wave 250 kHz to at least 500 MHz (higher Fluke 9500B1 Checking Analog Bandwidth,
for higher-bandwidth oscilloscopes). Trigger Sensitivity, Sample-
Variable amplitude from 60 mV to rate, External Clock, and
2 Vp-p into 50 Ω. Frequency error Delay-Time Accuracy
<2.0%
13. Meter, Level and Power Frequency range: 10 MHz to the Fluke 9500B1 Checking Analog Bandwidth
Sensor oscilloscope bandwidth. Amplitude and Trigger Sensitivity
range: 6 mVp-p to 2 Vp-p
14. Splitter, Power Frequency range: DC to 4 GHz. Fluke 9500B1 Checking Analog Bandwidth
Tracking: >2.0%
15. Adapter (four required) Male N-to-female BNC Tektronix part number Checking Analog Bandwidth
103-0045-00

4- 28 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Performance Tests

Table 4- 4: Test equipment (Cont.)

Item number and

description Minimum requirements Example Purpose
16. Adapter Female N-to-male BNC Tektronix part number Checking Analog Bandwidth
103-0058-00
17. Adapter (three required) SMA female-to-female Tektronix part number Checking the delay between
015-1012-00 channels
18. Adapter (three required) SMA male-to-female BNC Tektronix part number Checking the delay between
015-1018-00 channels
19. Pulse Generator 2 MHz, ≤150 ps rise time, 5 V out Fluke 9500B1,2 Used to Test Delta Time
Measurement Accuracy
20. Cable, Coaxial 50 Ω, 20 in, male-to-male SMA Tektronix part number Used to Test Delta Time
(two required) connectors 174-1427-00 Measurement Accuracy
21. Adapter SMA “T”, male to 2 SMA female Tektronix part number Used to Test Delta Time
015-1016-00 Measurement Accuracy
22. Adapter SMA female to BNC male Tektronix part number Used to Test Delta Time
015-0572-00 Measurement Accuracy
23. Adapter BNC male to female elbow Tektronix part number Used to Test Delta Time
103-0031-00 Measurement Accuracy
24. Terminator Short circuit, SMA connector Tektronix part number Used to Test Delta Time
015-1021-00 Measurement Accuracy
25. Attenuator, 2X Ratio: 2X; impedance 50 Ω; connec- Tektronix part number Used to Test Delta Time
tors: female BNC input, male BNC 011-0069-02 Measurement Accuracy
output
1 Fluke 9500B/1100, 9500B/3200, or 9500B/2200 and an output head (9510, 9530, or 9560) appropriate for the bandwidth of
the oscilloscope being tested.
2 For Delta Time Measurement Accuracy, use a Fluke 9500B or a pulse generator with a rise time as shown in Table 4- 9 on
page 4- 64.
3 P6139A probe is not appropriate for the TDS7104 oscilloscopes.
4 Warning: The P6243 and P6245 probes that may be used with this oscilloscope provide an extremely low loading
capacitance (<1 pF) to ensure the best possible signal reproduction. These probes should not be used to measure
signals exceeding ±8 V, or errors in signal measurement will be observed. Above 40 V, damage to the probe may result.
To make measurements beyond ±8 V, use either the P6139A probe (good to 500 V), or refer to the catalog for a recom-
mended probe. P6139A is not an appropriate probe for the TDS7104 oscilloscopes.

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 4- 29

Performance Tests

TDS7000 Test Record

Photocopy this table and use it to record the performance test results for your
TDS7000 Series Oscilloscope.

TDS 7000 Test Record

Instrument Serial Number: Certificate Number:

Temperature: RH %:
Date of Calibration: Technician:
TDS7000 performance test Minimum Incoming Outgoing Maximum
DC voltage measurement accuracy (averaged)
CH1 5 mV Vert scale setting, + 1.0355 V __________ __________ + 1.0445 V
- 5 Div position setting, +1 V offset
CH1 5 mV Vert scale setting, - 1.0445 V __________ __________ - 1.0355 V
+5 Div position setting, - 1 V offset
CH1 200 mV Vert scale setting, + 11.5195 V __________ __________ + 11.6805 V
- 5 Div position setting, +10 V offset
CH1 200 mV Vert scale setting, - 11.6805 V __________ __________ - 11.5195 V
+5 Div position setting, - 10 V offset
CH1 1.01 V Vert scale setting, + 17.621 V __________ __________ + 18.379 V
- 5 Div position setting, +10 V offset
CH1 1.01 V Vert scale setting, - 18.379 V __________ __________ - 17.621 V
+5 Div position setting, - 10 V offset
CH2 5 mV Vert scale setting, + 1.0355 V __________ __________ + 1.0445 V
- 5 Div position setting, +1 V offset
CH2 5 mV Vert scale setting, - 1.0445 V __________ __________ - 1.0355 V
+5 Div position setting, - 1 V offset
CH2 200 mV Vert scale setting, + 11.5195 V __________ __________ + 11.6805 V
- 5 Div position setting, +10 V offset
CH2 200 mV Vert scale setting, - 11.6805 V __________ __________ - 11.5195 V
+5 Div position setting, - 10 V offset
CH2 1.01 V Vert scale setting, + 17.621 V __________ __________ + 18.379 V
- 5 Div position setting, +10 V offset
CH2 1.01 V Vert scale setting, - 18.379 V __________ __________ - 17.621 V
+5 Div position setting, - 10 V offset
CH3 5 mV Vert scale setting, + 1.0355 V __________ __________ + 1.0445 V
- 5 Div position setting, +1 V offset
CH3 5 mV Vert scale setting, - 1.0445 V __________ __________ - 1.0355 V
+5 Div position setting, - 1 V offset
CH3 200 mV Vert scale setting, + 11.5195 V __________ __________ + 11.6805 V
- 5 Div position setting, +10 V offset

4- 30 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Performance Tests

TDS 7000 Test Record (Cont.)

Instrument Serial Number: Certificate Number:

Temperature: RH %:
Date of Calibration: Technician:
TDS7000 performance test Minimum Incoming Outgoing Maximum
CH3 200 mV Vert scale setting, - 11.6805 V __________ __________ - 11.5195 V
+5 Div position setting, - 10 V offset
CH3 1.01 V Vert scale setting, + 17.621 V __________ __________ + 18.379 V
- 5 Div position setting, +10 V offset
CH3 1.01 V Vert scale setting, - 18.379 V __________ __________ - 17.621 V
+5 Div position setting, - 10 V offset
CH4 5 mV Vert scale setting, + 1.0355 V __________ __________ + 1.0445 V
- 5 Div position setting, +1 V offset
CH4 5 mV Vert scale setting, - 1.0445 V __________ __________ - 1.0355 V
+5 Div position setting, - 1 V offset
CH4 200 mV Vert scale setting, + 11.5195 V __________ __________ + 11.6805 V
- 5 Div position setting, +10 V offset
CH4 200 mV Vert scale setting, - 11.6805 V __________ __________ - 11.5195 V
+5 Div position setting, - 10 V offset
CH4 1.01 V Vert scale setting, + 17.621 V __________ __________ + 18.379 V
- 5 Div position setting, +10 V offset
CH4 1.01 V Vert scale setting, - 18.379 V __________ __________ - 17.621 V
+5 Div position setting, - 10 V offset

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 4- 31

Performance Tests

TDS 7000 Test Record (Cont.)

Instrument Serial Number: Certificate Number:

Temperature: RH %:
Date of Calibration: Technician:
TDS7000 performance test Minimum Incoming Outgoing Maximum
DC gain accuracy (averaged)
CH1 200 mV Vert scale setting, g,
0 Di
Div position
i i setting,
i 0 V offset
ff + 1.5048
1 5048 V __________ __________ + 1.5352
1 5352 V
- 5 Div position setting, +10 V offset + 1.5048 V __________ __________ + 1.5352 V
+5 Div position setting, - 10 V offset - 1.5352 V __________ __________ - 1.5048 V
CH2 200 mV Vert scale setting, g,
0 Di
Div position
i i setting,
i 0 V offset
ff + 1.5048
1 5048 V __________ __________ + 1.5352
1 5352 V
- 5 Div position setting, +10 V offset + 1.5048 V __________ __________ + 1.5352 V
+5 Div position setting, - 10 V offset - 1.5352 V __________ __________ - 1.5048 V
CH3 200 mV Vert scale setting, g,
0 Di
Div position
i i setting,
i 0 V offset
ff + 1.5048
1 5048 V __________ __________ + 1.5352
1 5352 V
- 5 Div position setting, +10 V offset + 1.5048 V __________ __________ + 1.5352 V
+5 Div position setting, - 10 V offset - 1.5352 V __________ __________ - 1.5048 V
CH4 200 mV Vert scale setting, g,
0 Di
Div position
i i setting,
i 0 V offset
ff + 1.5048
1 5048 V __________ __________ + 1.5352
1 5352 V
- 5 Div position setting, +10 V offset + 1.5048 V __________ __________ + 1.5352 V
+5 Div position setting, - 10 V offset - 1.5352 V __________ __________ - 1.5048 V
Analog bandwidth
CH1 100 mV 424 mV __________ __________ N/A
CH2 100 mV 424 mV __________ __________ N/A
CH3 100 mV 424 mV __________ __________ N/A
CH4 100 mV 424 mV __________ __________ N/A
Delay between channels N/A __________ __________ 50 ps

4- 32 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Performance Tests

TDS 7000 Test Record (Cont.)

Instrument Serial Number: Certificate Number:

Temperature: RH %:
Date of Calibration: Technician:
TDS7000 performance test Minimum Incoming Outgoing Maximum
Channel isolation 100 MHz
100 mV
CH 1 N/A __________ __________ 0.10 divisions
CH 2 N/A __________ __________ 0.10 divisions
CH 3 N/A __________ __________ 0.10 divisions
CH 4 N/A __________ __________ 0.10 divisions
50 mV
CH 1 N/A __________ __________ 0.10 divisions
CH 2 N/A __________ __________ 0.10 divisions
CH 3 N/A __________ __________ 0.10 divisions
CH 4 N/A __________ __________ 0.10 divisions
10 mV
CH 1 N/A __________ __________ 0.10 divisions
CH 2 N/A __________ __________ 0.10 divisions
CH 3 N/A __________ __________ 0.10 divisions
CH 4 N/A __________ __________ 0.10 divisions
full bandwidth
100 mV
CH 1 N/A __________ __________ 0.333 divisions
CH 2 N/A __________ __________ 0.333 divisions
CH 3 N/A __________ __________ 0.333 divisions
CH 4 N/A __________ __________ 0.333 divisions
50 mV
CH 1 N/A __________ __________ 0.333 divisions
CH 2 N/A __________ __________ 0.333 divisions
CH 3 N/A __________ __________ 0.333 divisions
CH 4 N/A __________ __________ 0.333 divisions
10 mV
CH 1 N/A __________ __________ 0.333 divisions
CH 2 N/A __________ __________ 0.333 divisions
CH 3 N/A __________ __________ 0.333 divisions
CH 4 N/A __________ __________ 0.333 divisions

Time base system

Long term sample rate and delay time accuracy - 0.75 divisions __________ __________ +0.75 divisions
Internal reference output voltages
Vout (HI) 1.0 V __________ __________ N/A
Vout (LO) N/A __________ __________ 0.25 V
Delta time measurement
TDS7104 N/A __________ __________ ≤0.030 ns
TDS7054 N/A __________ __________ ≤0.060 ns

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 4- 33

Performance Tests

TDS 7000 Test Record (Cont.)

Instrument Serial Number: Certificate Number:

Temperature: RH %:
Date of Calibration: Technician:
TDS7000 performance test Minimum Incoming Outgoing Maximum
Trigger system accuracy
Time accuracy for pulse, glitch, timeout, and
Width, Hor. scale ≤ 1 s
Lower Limit 3.5 ns __________ __________ 6.5 ns
Upper Limit 3.5 ns __________ __________ 6.5 ns
Time accuracy for pulse, glitch, timeout, and
width, Hor. scale > 1 s
Lower Limit 1.9 s __________ __________ 2.1 s
Upper Limit 1.9 s __________ __________ 2.1 s
CH1 sensitivity, 50 MHz Pass/Fail __________ __________ Pass/Fail
CH1 delayed sensitivity, 50 MHz Pass/Fail __________ __________ Pass/Fail
CH1 AUX trigger input, 50 MHz Pass/Fail __________ __________ Pass/Fail
CH1 sensitivity, full bandwidth Pass/Fail __________ __________ Pass/Fail
CH1 delayed sensitivity, full bandwidth Pass/Fail __________ __________ Pass/Fail
CH1 AUX trigger input, 100 MHz Pass/Fail __________ __________ Pass/Fail
Output signal checks
Auxiliary trigger output, open circuit
High High ≥ 2.5 V __________ __________
Low __________ __________ Low ≤ 0.7 V
Auxiliary trigger output, 50 Ω
High High ≥ 1.0 V __________ __________
Low __________ __________ Low ≤ 0.25 V
Analog signal output, 1 MΩ p-p ≥ 80 mV __________ __________ p-p ≤ 120 mV
Analog signal output, 50 Ω p-p ≥ 44 mV __________ __________ p-p ≤ 66 mV
Probe compensation output signal
Frequency 950 Hz __________ __________ 1.050 kHz
Voltage (difference) 990 mV __________ __________ 1010 mV

4- 34 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Performance Tests

Signal Acquisition System Checks

These procedures check those characteristics that relate to the signal-acquisition
system and are listed as checked under Warranted Characteristics in Specifica-
tions. Refer to Table 4--4 on page 4--28 for test equipment specifications.

Check DC Voltage
Measurement Accuracy
WARNING. The generator is capable of outputting dangerous voltages. Be sure to
set the DC calibration generator to off or 0 volts before connecting, disconnect-
ing, and/or moving the test hookup during the performance of this procedure.
Also, check that the calibrator does not have shorting straps installed between
the DC output and Sense input or grounds.

Equipment Two dual-banana connectors (Item 5)

required
One BNC T connector (Item 6)
One DC calibration generator (Item 9)
Two precision 50 Ω coaxial cables (Item 4)
Prerequisites The oscilloscope must meet the prerequisites listed on page 4-- 27

1. Install the test hookup and preset the instrument controls:

a. Hook up the test-signal source:
H Set the output of a DC calibration generator to off or 0 volts.
H Connect the output of a DC calibration generator through a
dual-banana connector followed by a 50 Ω precision coaxial cable to
one side of a BNC T connector. See Figure 4--14.

H Connect the Sense input of the generator through a second dual-ba-

nana connector followed by a 50 Ω precision coaxial cable to the
other side of the BNC T connector. Now connect the BNC T
connector to CH 1. See Figure 4--14.

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 4- 35

Performance Tests

TDS7000 oscilloscope
Output Sense

DC calibrator

Dual banana to
BNC adapters

BNC T
connector
50 Ω coaxial cables

Figure 4- 14: Initial test hookup

b. Initialize the oscilloscope: Press DEFAULT SETUP.

c. Modify the default settings:
H From the tool bar, touch Horiz and select the Acquisition tab.
H Touch Average and set the number of averages to 16.
2. Confirm input channels are within limits for DC accuracy at maximum offset
and position: Do the following substeps — test CH 1 first, skipping substep
2a since CH 1 is already selected from step 1.

a. Select an unchecked channel:

H From the tool bar, touch MEAS and then Clear to remove the
previous measurement.
H Press the Vertical button of the channel just confirmed to remove the
channel from the display.

H Press the front-panel Vertical button that corresponds to the channel

you are to confirm.

H Set the generator output to 0 V.

H Move the test hookup to the channel you selected.
b. Turn on the measurement Mean for the channel:

H From the tool bar, touch MEAS and select the Ampl tab, then touch
Mean to measure the mean of the current channel.
H Touch Setup Statistics and touch Measurement Statistics Mean to
display the measurement statistics of the mean measurement.

4- 36 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Performance Tests

H Press Close.
c. Set the vertical scale: Set the vertical SCALE to one of the settings
listed in Table 4--5 that is not yet checked. (Start with the first setting
listed).

Table 4- 5: DC Voltage measurement accuracy

Scale Position setting Offset Generator

setting (Divs) setting setting Accuracy limits
5 mV -5 +1 V +1.040 V +1.0355 V to +1.0445 V
+5 -1 V - 1.040 V - 1.0445 V to - 1.0355 V
200 mV - 5 +10 V +11.6 V +11.5195 V to +11.6805 V
+5 - 10 V - 11.6 V - 11.6805 V to - 11.5195 V
1.01 V -5 +10 V +18 V +17.621 V to +18.379 V
+5 - 10 V - 18 V - 18.379 V to - 17.621 V

d. Display the test signal:

H From the tool bar touch VERT and touch Position.
H Use the keypad to set vertical position to --5 divisions (press CLR,
5, --, and then ENTER, on the keypad). The baseline level will move
off screen.
H Touch Offset.

H Use the keypad to set vertical offset to the positive-polarity setting

listed in the table for the current vertical scale setting. The baseline
level will remain off screen.
H Set the generator to the level and polarity indicated in the table for
the vertical scale, position, and offset settings you have made. The
DC test level should appear on screen. (If it doesn’t return, the DC
accuracy check has failed for the current vertical scale setting of the
current channel).
e. Measure the test signal: Press Close. Read the measurement results at
the measurement statistics
measurement readout. See Figure 4--15.

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 4- 37

Performance Tests

Turn on the measurement

called mean and read the
results here.

Figure 4- 15: Measurement of DC accuracy at maximum offset and position

f. Check against limits:

H CHECK that the readout for the measurement
readout on screen is
within the limits listed for the current vertical scale and position/off-
set/generator settings. Enter value on test record.

H Repeat substep d, reversing the polarity of the position, offset, and

generator settings as is listed in the table.
H CHECK that the
measurement readout on screen is within the
limits listed for the current vertical scale setting and position/offset/
generator settings. Enter value on test record.
H Repeat substeps c through f until all vertical scale settings, listed in
Table 4--5, are checked for the channel under test.
g. Test all channels: Repeat substeps a through f for all four channels.
3. Disconnect the hookup:
a. Set the generator output to 0 V.
b. Disconnect the cable from the generator output at the input connector of
the channel last tested.

4- 38 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Performance Tests

Check DC Gain Accuracy

Equipment Two dual-banana connectors (Item 5)

required
One BNC T connector (Item 6)
One DC calibration generator (Item 9)
Two precision 50 Ω coaxial cables (Item 4)
Prerequisites The instrument must meet the prerequisites listed on page 4-- 27

WARNING. The generator is capable of outputting dangerous voltages. Be sure to

set the DC calibration generator to off or 0 volts before connecting, disconnect-
ing, and/or moving the test hookup during the performance of this procedure.
Also, check that the calibrator does not have shorting straps installed between
the DC output and Sense input or grounds.

1. Install the test hookup and preset the instrument controls:

a. Hook up the test-signal source:
H Set the output of a DC calibration generator to off or 0 volts.
H Connect the output of a DC calibration generator through a
dual-banana connector followed by a 50 Ω precision coaxial cable to
one side of a BNC T connector. See Figure 4--16.
H Connect the Sense input of the generator through a second dual-ba-
nana connector followed by a 50 Ω precision coaxial cable to the
other side of the BNC T connector. Now connect the BNC T
connector to CH 1 through an adapter. See Figure 4--16.

TDS7000 oscilloscope
Output Sense

DC calibrator

Dual banana to
BNC adapters

BNC T
connector
50 Ω coaxial cables

Figure 4- 16: Initial test hookup

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 4- 39

Performance Tests

b. Initialize the oscilloscope: Press DEFAULT SETUP.

c. Modify the default settings:
H From the tool bar, touch Horiz and select the Acquisition tab.

H Touch Average and set the number of averages to 16.

2. Confirm input channels are within limits for DC accuracy at maximum offset
and position: Do the following substeps — test CH 1 first, skipping substep
2a since CH 1 is already selected from step 1.
a. Select an unchecked channel:

H From the tool bar, touch MEAS and then Clear to remove the
previous measurement.
H Press the Vertical button of the channel just confirmed to remove the
channel from the display.
H Press the front-panel Vertical button that corresponds to the channel
you are to confirm.
H Set the generator output to 0 V.

H Move the test hookup to the channel you selected.

b. Turn on the measurement Mean for the channel:
H From the tool bar, touch MEAS and select the Ampl tab, then touch
Mean to measure the mean of the current channel.
H Touch Setup Statistics and touch Measurement Statistics Mean to
display the measurement statistics of the mean measurement.
H Press Close.
c. Set the vertical scale: Set the vertical SCALE to one of the settings in
Table 4--6 that is not yet checked. (Start with the first setting listed).

4- 40 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Performance Tests

Table 4- 6: Gain accuracy

Difference of
Scale Position Offset Generator Measurement measurement
Channel setting setting (Divs) setting setting mean means Accuracy limits
CH1 200 mV 0 0V +760 mV +1.5048 V to +1.5352 V
- 760 mV
-5 +10 V +11.76 V +1.5048 V to +1.5352 V
+10.24 V
+5 - 10 V - 11.76 V - 1.5352 V to - 1.5048 V
- 10.24 V
CH2 200 mV 0 0V +760 mV +1.5048 V to +1.5352 V
- 760 mV
-5 +10 V +11.76 V +1.5048 V to +1.5352 V
+10.24 V
+5 - 10 V - 11.76 V - 1.5352 V to - 1.5048 V
- 10.24 V
CH3 200 mV 0 0V +760 mV +1.5048 V to +1.5352 V
- 760 mV
-5 +10 V +11.76 V +1.5048 V to +1.5352 V
+10.24 V
+5 - 10 V - 11.76 V - 1.5352 V to - 1.5048 V
- 10.24 V
CH4 200 mV 0 0V +760 mV +1.5048 V to +1.5352 V
- 760 mV
-5 +10 V +11.76 V +1.5048 V to +1.5352 V
+10.24 V
+5 - 10 V - 11.76 V - 1.5352 V to - 1.5048 V
- 10.24 V

d. Display the test signal:

H From the tool bar touch VERT and then touch Position.
H Use the keypad to set vertical position to the number of divisions
listed in the table for the current vertical scale setting and offset.
H Touch Offset.

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 4- 41

Performance Tests

H Use the keypad to set vertical offset to the setting listed in the table
for the current vertical scale and position settings. The baseline level
may move off screen.
H Set the generator to the level and polarity indicated in the table for
the vertical scale, position, and offset settings you have made. The
DC test level should appear on screen. (If it doesn’t return, the
accuracy check has failed for the current vertical scale, position, and
offset settings of the current channel).
e. Measure the test signal: Press Close.
H Read the measurement results at the measurement statistics

measurement readout. See Figure 4--17.
H Record the Mean in the Measurement Mean column of Table 4--6.

Turn on the measurement

called mean and read the
results here.

Figure 4- 17: Measurement of DC gain accuracy

f. Measure second mean:

H Set the generator to the second level and polarity indicated in the
table for the vertical scale, position, and offset settings you have
made. The DC test level should appear on screen. (If it doesn’t, the
accuracy check has failed for the current vertical scale, position, and
offset settings of the current channel).

H Repeat substep e using the current vertical scale, position, offset, and
new generator setting for the second mean.
g. Check against limits:
H Subtract the second measurement mean from the first measurement
mean for the current vertical scale, position, and offset.

4- 42 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Performance Tests

H Record the difference of the two mean measurements in the

Difference of Measurement Means column of Table 4--6.
H CHECK that the Difference of Measurement Mean is within the
limits listed for the current vertical scale/position/offset/generator
settings. Enter measurement mean difference value on test record.
h. Test all channels: Repeat substeps a through g for all four channels.
3. Disconnect the hookup:
a. Set the generator output to 0 V.
b. Disconnect the cable from the generator output and the input connector
of the channel last tested.

Check Analog Bandwidth Equipment One sine wave generator (Item 12)
required
One level meter and power sensor (Item 13)
One power divider (Item 14)
One female N to male BNC adapter (Item 16)
Four male N to female BNC adapters (Item 15)
Two 50 Ω precision cables (Item 4)
Attenuators (Items 1 and 2)
Optional: One high-frequency leveled sine wave generator and its
leveling head - replaces items 12, 13, 14, 15, and 16
Prerequisites See page 4-- 27

1. Install the test hookup and preset the instrument controls:

a. Initialize the oscilloscope:
H Press DEFAULT SETUP.
b. Modify the default settings:
H Turn the horizontal SCALE knob to 40 ns.

H From the tool bar, touch Horiz and select the Acquisition tab.
H Touch Average and set the number of averages to 16.
H Touch the Equivalent Time ET button.
H From the tool bar, touch MEAS. Touch Setup Ref Levs; then touch
the Determine Base, Top Form Min-Max button.

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 4- 43

Performance Tests

NOTE. The sine wave generator output amplitude must be leveled to within
0.35 db of the reference frequency (10 MHz) through the bandwidth frequency
listed in Table 4--7 on page 4--46. The 0.35 db requirement is necessary to ensure
a bandwidth that meets Tektronix specifications.

You can perform bandwidth PV using an unleveled sine wave generator (with
amplitude error > 0.35 db). Under these conditions, the bandwidth PV is subject
to the flatness errors associated with the generator used.

Refer to the Sine Wave Generator Leveling Procedure on page 4--81 if your sine
wave generator does not have automatic output amplitude leveling.

c. Hook up the test-signal source: Connect the sine wave output of a

leveled sine wave generator to CH 1. Set the output of the generator to a
reference frequency of 10 MHz or less. See Figure 4--18.
For the optional setup using a leveled sine wave generator with a
leveling head, see Figure 4--19 and, if using this optional setup with the
example Tektronix SG 504, set the generator output to 6 MHz.

Sine wave TDS7000 oscilloscope

generator

Output

Figure 4- 18: Initial test hookup

TDS7000 oscilloscope
High frequency sine
wave generator

Output

Leveling head

Figure 4- 19: Optional initial test hookup

4- 44 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Performance Tests

2. Confirm the input channels are within limits for analog bandwidth: Do the
following substeps — test CH 1 first, skipping substeps a and b since CH 1
is already set up for testing from step 1.
a. Select an unchecked channel:
H From the tool bar, touch MEAS and then Clear to remove the
previous measurement.
H Press the Vertical button of the channel just confirmed to remove the
channel from the display.
H Press the front-panel Vertical button that corresponds to the channel
you are to confirm.
H Move the leveling output of the sine wave generator to the channel
you selected.
b. Match the trigger source to the channel selected: Press the Trigger
SOURCE button until the source that corresponds to the channel you are
to confirm is on.
c. Set its input impedance: From the button bar, touch the VERT button
and select the tab for the channel you are to confirm. Touch the
Termination 50 Ω button.
d. Set the vertical scale: Set the vertical SCALE that corresponds to the
channel you are to confirm to one of the settings listed in Table 4--7 not
yet checked. (Start with the 100 mV setting).
e. Set the triggering coupling: Touch the Coupling DC button.

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 4- 45

Performance Tests

Table 4- 7: Analog bandwidth

Reference Test frequency

Vertical
V ti l amplitude
lit d Horizontal
H i t l
scale (6 divisions) scale TDS7054 TDS7104 - 3 db Limits
1 mV 6 mV 1 ns 450 MHz 500 MHz ≥4.24 mV
2 mV 12 mV 1 ns 500 MHz 600 MHz ≥8.48 mV
5 mV 30 mV 1 ns 500 MHz 750 MHz ≥21.2 mV
10 mV 60 mV 1 ns 500 MHz 1000 MHz ≥42.4 mV
20 mV 120 mV 1 ns 500 MHz 1000 MHz ≥84.8 mV
50 mV 300 mV 1 ns 500 MHz 1000 MHz ≥212 mV
100 mV 600 mV 1 ns 500 MHz 1000 MHz ≥424 mV
200 mV 1.2 V 1 ns 500 MHz 1000 MHz ≥848 mV
500 mV 3 V1 1 ns 500 MHz 1000 MHz ≥2.12 V1
1V 6 V1 1 ns 500 MHz 1000 MHz ≥4.24 V1
1 If your generator cannot output 6 divisions of amplitude, determine its maximum
output at the Test frequency, and use this for the reference amplitude. The - 3 db
limit can be calculated as: 0.707 × reference amplitude.

f. Display the test signal: Do the following subparts to first display the
reference signal and then the test signal.
H From the button bar touch MEAS; then select the Time tab.

H Touch the Freq button to measure the frequency of the current

channel.
H Select the Ampl tab. Touch the Pk-Pk button.
H Touch Close button.

H Set the generator output so the CHx Pk-Pk readout equals the
reference amplitude in Table 4--7 that corresponds to the vertical
scale set in substep d.

H Press the front-panel PUSH TO SET 50% as necessary to trigger a

stable display. At full bandwidth, you may also want to make small,
manual adjustments to the trigger level. You can use the Trigger
LEVEL knob to do this. (Full bandwidth varies with TDS model as
is shown in Table 4--7).
g. Measure the test signal:
H Set the frequency of the generator, as shown on screen, to the test
frequency in Table 4--7 that corresponds to the vertical scale set in
substep d. See Figure 4--20.

4- 46 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Performance Tests

H Set the horizontal SCALE to the horizontal scale setting in

Table 4--7 that corresponds to the vertical scale set in substep d.
Press PUSH TO SET 50% as necessary to trigger the signal.
H Read the results at the CHx Pk-Pk readout, which will automatically
measure the amplitude of the test signal. See Figure 4--20.

Set the generator

(reference) frequency to
the test frequency from 1
Table 4-- 7.

Read results. 3

Set the horizontal scale

from Table 4-- 7. 2

Figure 4- 20: Measurement of analog bandwidth

h. Check against limits:

H CHECK that the Pk-Pk readout on screen is within the limits listed
in Table 4--7 for the current vertical scale setting.
H Enter voltage on the test record.
H When finished checking, set the horizontal SCALE back to the
50 ns setting.

STOP. Checking each channel’s bandwidth at all vertical scale settings is time
consuming and unnecessary. You may skip checking the remaining vertical scale
settings in Table 4--7 (that is, skip the following substep, i) if this oscilloscope
has performed as follows:

H Passed the 100 mV vertical scale setting just checked in this

procedure.
H Passed the Verify Internal Adjustment, Self Compensation, and
Diagnostics procedure found under Self Tests, on page 4--5.

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 4- 47

Performance Tests

NOTE. Passing the signal path compensation confirms the signal path for all
vertical scale settings for all channels. Passing the internal diagnostics ensures
that the factory-set adjustment constants that control the bandwidth for each
vertical scale setting have not changed.

i. Check remaining vertical scale settings against limits (optional):

H If desired, finish checking the remaining vertical scale settings for
the channel under test by repeating substeps d through h for each of
the remaining scale settings listed in Table 4--7 for the channel under
test.
H When doing substep f, skip the subparts that turn on the CHx Pk-Pk
measurement until you check a new channel.
H Before doing substep f, touch the Clear button to remove the
previous channel measurements.
H Install/remove attenuators between the generator leveling head and
the channel input as needed to obtain the six division reference
signals listed in the table.
j. Test all channels: Repeat substeps a through h for all four channels.
3. Disconnect the hookup: Disconnect the test hook up from the input
connector of the channel last tested.

Check Delay Between Equipment One sine wave generator (Item 12)
Channels required
Three precision 50 Ω coaxial cables (Item 4)
One power divider (Item 14)
3 SMA female to female adapter connector (Item 17)
3 SMA male-to-female BNC adapter connector (Item 18)
Prerequisites See page 4-- 27

STOP. DO NOT use the vertical position knob to reposition any channel while
doing this check. To do so invalidates the test.

1. Install the test hookup and preset the instrument controls:

a. Initialize the front panel:Press the DEFAULT SETUP button.

b. Modify the initialized front-panel control settings:

H Do not adjust the vertical position of any channel during this
procedure.

4- 48 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Performance Tests

H Set the horizontal SCALE to 500 ps.

H From the tool bar, touch Horiz and select the Acquisition tab.
H Touch Average and set the number of averages to 16.

c. Hook up the test-signal source:

H Connect the sine wave output of a sine wave generator to a 50 Ω
precision coaxial cable followed by a power divider.
H Connect the power divider to both CH 1 and CH 2. See
Figure 4--21.

TDS7000 oscilloscope
Sine wave
generator

Output

Power divider
Male SMA to
female BNC
3 places
SMA female-
to-female

Figure 4- 21: Initial test hookup

2. Confirm all four channels are within limits for channel delay:
a. Set up the generator: Set the generator frequency to 250 MHz and the
amplitude for six to eight divisions in CH 1.
Hint: As you are adjusting the generator amplitude, push PUSH TO
SET 50% frequently to speed up the updating of the waveform
amplitude on screen.
b. The horizontal SCALE should already be set to 500 ps. Now set it to
200 ps.

c. Save a CH 2 waveform: Press the CH 2 Vertical button. From the button

bar, touch the Refs button and select the Ref 2 tab. Touch the Save Wfm
to Ref2 Save button.

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 4- 49

Performance Tests

d. Save CH 3 waveform:
H Move the power divider from CH 2 to CH 3, so that CH 1 and
CH 3 are driven. Press the Vertical CH 2 and CH 3 buttons. Select
the Ref 3 tab and touch the Ch Channel 3 button. Touch the Save
Wfm to Ref3 Save button.
e. Display all test signals:
H Press the CH 3 Vertical button to remove CH 3 from the display.
H Display the live waveform. Move the power divider from CH 3 to
CH 4, so that CH 1 and CH 4 are driven. Press the Vertical CH 4
button to display. See Figure 4--22 on page 4--51.
H Display the reference waveforms. To do this, touch the Ref 3
Display Off button to toggle it to On and display the reference.
Select the Ref 2 tab and touch the Display Off button to toggle it to
On. You may notice their overlapping waveform handle icons. See
Figure 4--22 on page 4--51.
f. Measure the test signal:

H Locate the time reference points for these waveforms. Do this by

first identifying the point where the rising edge of the left-most
waveform crosses the center horizontal graticule line. Next, note the
corresponding time reference point for the right-most waveform. See
Figure 4--22 on page 4--51.
H Press CURSORS and select the V Bars Cursors Type.
H Touch the Close button.

4- 50 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Performance Tests

Read results 4
Display the waveforms 1

2 3
Locate the time reference Align each cursor to the time
points for these waveforms reference points

Figure 4- 22: Measurement of channel delay

g. Check against limits: Use the cursors to measure the skew from CH 1 to
CH 2, CH 1 to CH 3, and CH 1 to CH 4. Write down these three
numbers in the first measurement column of Table 4--8. Note that these
numbers may be either positive or negative.
h. Move the power divider on CH 1 to CH 2. Move the power divider on
CH 4 to CH 1.

NOTE. To eliminate errors caused by the cables, the measurements are repeated
and averaged after swapping the channel position of the cables.

i. Repeat the procedure from step 1.c through 2.e.

j. Again use the cursors to measure the skew from CH 1 to CH 2, CH 1 to
CH 3, and CH 1 to CH 4. Write down these numbers in the second
measurement column of Table 4--8. Note that these numbers may be
either positive or negative.

k. Add the first CH 1 to CH 2 skew measurement to the second CH 1 to

CH 2 skew measurement and divide the result by 2. Use Table 4--8.

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 4- 51

Performance Tests

l. Add the first CH 1 to CH 3 skew measurement to the second CH 1 to

CH 3 skew measurement and divide the result by 2. Use Table 4--8.
m. Add the first CH 1 to CH 4 skew measurement to the second CH 1 to
CH 4 skew measurement and divide the result by 2. Use Table 4--8.
n. Check against limits: CHECK that the largest of the three results from
steps k, l, and m is between --50 ps and + 50 ps.
o. Enter the time on the test record.

Table 4- 8: Delay between channels worksheet

Add first and

First Second second Divide sum
Coupling measurement measurement measurements by 2
CH 1 to CH 2
skew
CH 1 to CH 3
skew
CH 1 to CH 4
skew

3. Disconnect the hookup: Disconnect the cable from the generator output at
the input connectors of the channels.

Check Channel Isolation Equipment One leveled sine-wave generator (Item 12)
(Crosstalk) required
One 50 Ω, precision coaxial cable (Item 4)
One 2X attenuator (item 25)
Prerequisites See page 4-- 27

4- 52 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Performance Tests

Leveled
TDS7000 oscilloscope
sine wave
generator

Output

2X Attenuator

50 Ω coaxial cable

Figure 4- 23: Initial test hookup

1. Install the test hookup and preset the instrument controls:

a. Hook up the test-signal source: Connect, through a 50 Ω precision
coaxial cable and a 2X attenuator, the output of the generator to CH 1
(see Figure 4--23).

b. Initialize the oscilloscope: Press the DEFAULT SETUP button.

c. Modify the initialized control settings:
H Turn on all vertical channels (press the Vertical button of any off
channels: CH 1, CH 2, CH 3, and CH 4).
H From the button bar, touch the Vert button. Set the termination of
each channel to 50 Ω by selecting each channel tab and touching its
Termination 50 Ω button.

H Set the Vertical SCALE of CH 1, CH 2, CH 3, and CH 4 to 100 mV.

H Set the Trigger SOURCE to CH 1.
H Set the Horizontal SCALE 20 ns.
H Touch the Close button.
H From the button bar, touch the Meas button, select the Ampl tab,
and touch the Amplitude button.
2. Display the test signal:
H Set the generator to output a 100 MHz sine wave. Set the test signal
amplitude for about five divisions on screen. Now fine adjust the
generator output until the CH 1 Amplitude readout indicates the
amplitude is 500 mV. Readout may fluctuate around 500 mV.

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 4- 53

Performance Tests

H Remove the 2X attenuator.

3. Check channel isolation against limits:
a. Check — Amplitude of each trace other than CH 1 is 0.1 division or less
(discount trace width). Enter the largest amplitude on the test record.

b. Move the signal to the CH 2 input connector and change the Trigger
SOURCE to CH 2.
c. Check — Amplitude of each trace other than CH 2 is 0.1 division or less
(discount trace width). Enter the largest amplitude on the test record.
d. Move the signal to the CH 3 input connector and change the Trigger
SOURCE to CH 3.

e. Check — Amplitude of each trace other than CH 3 is 0.1 division or less

(discount trace width). Enter the largest amplitude on the test record.
f. Move the signal to the CH 4 input connector and change the Trigger
SOURCE to CH 4.
g. Check — Amplitude of each trace other than CH 4 is 0.1 division or less
(discount trace width). Enter the largest amplitude on the test record.
h. Select an unchecked vertical SCALE:
H Connect the 2X attenuator to the CH 1 input.
H Move the signal to the CH1 input, and change the Trigger Source to
CH 1.
H Press PUSH TO SET 50%.

H Set the Vertical SCALE of CH 1, CH 2, CH 3, and CH 4 to 50 mV.

H Set the test signal amplitude for about five divisions on screen. Now
fine adjust the generator output until the CH 1 Amplitude readout
indicates the amplitude is 250 mV. Readout may fluctuate around
250 mV.
H Remove the 2X attenuator.

H Repeat steps a through g.

H Connect the 2X attenuator to CH 1.
H Move the signal to the CH 1 input, and change the Trigger Source to
CH 1.
H Press PUSH TO SET 50%.

H Set the Vertical SCALE of CH 1, CH 2, CH 3, and CH 4 to 10 mV.

4- 54 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Performance Tests

H Set the test signal amplitude for about five divisions on screen. Now
fine adjust the generator output until the CH 1 Amplitude readout
indicates the amplitude is 50 mV. Readout may fluctuate around
50 mV.
H Remove the 2X attenuator.
H Repeat steps a through g.
i. Move the signal to the CH 1 input connector and change the Trigger
SOURCE to CH 1.
H Connect the 2X attenuator to CH 1.
H Set the Vertical SCALE of CH 1, CH 2, CH 3, and CH 4 to 100 mV.

H Set the Horizontal SCALE to display 2 to 5 cycles of the signal.

j. Set the generator output frequency to the full bandwidth of your
instrument (500 MHz for the TDS7054. or 1000 MHz for the TDS7104).
H Set the test signal amplitude for about five divisions on screen. Now
fine adjust the generator output until the CH 1 Amplitude readout
indicates the amplitude is 500 mV. Readout may fluctuate around
500 mV.
H Remove the 2X attenuator.
k. Check — Amplitude of each trace other than CH 1 is 0.333 division or
less (discount trace width). Enter the largest amplitude on the test record.
l. Move the signal to the CH 2 input connector and change the Trigger
SOURCE to CH 2.
m. Check — Amplitude of each trace other than CH 2 is 0.333 division or
less (discount trace width). Enter the largest amplitude on the test record.

n. Move the signal to the CH 3 input connector and change the Trigger
SOURCE to CH 3.
o. Check — Amplitude of each trace other than CH 3 is 0.333 division or
less (discount trace width). Enter the largest amplitude on the test record.
p. Move the signal to the CH 4 input connector and change the Trigger
SOURCE to CH 4.
q. Check — Amplitude of each trace other than CH 4 is 0.333 division or
less (discount trace width). Enter the largest amplitude on the test record.
r. Select an unchecked Vertical SCALE:
H Connect the 2X attenuator to CH 1.

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 4- 55

Performance Tests

H Move the signal to CH 1, and set the Trigger SOURCE to CH 1.

H Press PUSH TO SET 50%.
H Set the Vertical SCALE of CH 1, CH 2, CH 3, and CH 4 to 50 mV.

H Set the test signal amplitude for about five divisions on screen. Now
fine adjust the generator output until the CH 1 Amplitude readout
indicates the amplitude is 250 mV. Readout may fluctuate around
250 mV.
H Remove the 2X attenuator.
H Repeat steps k through q.
H Connect the 2X attenuator to CH 1.
H Move the coaxial cable to CH 1, and set the Trigger SOURCE to
CH 1.
H Set the Vertical SCALE of CH 1, CH 2, CH 3, and CH 4 to 10 mV.
H Set the test signal amplitude for about five divisions on screen. Now
fine adjust the generator output until the CH 1 Amplitude readout
indicates the amplitude is 50 mV. Readout may fluctuate around
50 mV.
H Remove the 2X attenuator.
H Repeat steps a through g.
4. Disconnect the hookup: Disconnect the cable from the generator output at
the input connector of the channel.

4- 56 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Performance Tests

Time Base System Checks

These procedures check those characteristics that relate to the time base system
and are listed as checked under Warranted Characteristics in Specifications.

Check Long-Term Sample Equipment One time-mark generator (Item 11), or

Rate and Delay Time required Sine wave generator (Item 12)
Accuracy and Reference One 50 Ω, precision coaxial cable (Item 4)
Prerequisites See page 4-- 27

Time mark or
TDS7000 oscilloscope
sine wave
generator

Output

50 Ω coaxial cable

Figure 4- 24: Initial test hookup

1. Install the test hookup and preset the instrument controls:

a. Hook up the test-signal source: Connect, through a 50 Ω precision
coaxial cable, the output of the generator to CH 1 (see Figure 4--24).
H If using a time-mark generator, set the output for 10 ms markers.

H If using a sine wave generator, set the output for 1.2 V and 500 kHz.
b. Initialize the oscilloscope: Press the DEFAULT SETUP button.
c. Modify the initialized front-panel control settings:
H Set the Vertical SCALE to 200 mV (or 500 mV with the optional
Tektronix TG 501A Time Mark Generator).
H Set the Horizontal SCALE to 200 ns.
H From the button bar, touch the Vert button. Touch the Termination
50 Ω button.

H Press PUSH TO SET 50%.

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 4- 57

Performance Tests

H Touch the Close button.

H Use the Vertical POSITION knob to center the test signal on screen.
H Press the Trigger MODE button to toggle it to NORMAL.

2. Confirm the time base is within limits for accuracies:

a. Measure the test signal:
H If using a time-mark generator, align the trigger T to the center
vertical graticule line by adjusting the Horizontal POSITION. See
Figure 4--25 on page 4--59.

H If using a sine wave generator, align the rising edge of the sine wave
on the center graticule crosshairs by adjusting the Horizontal
POSITION.
H From the button bar, touch the Horiz button and select the HOR-
IZONTAL tab.
H Press the Horizontal DELAY Mode button to toggle it on. See
Figure 4--25 on page 4--59.
H Set the delay time to 10.000000 ms. (Do this by touching Horiz
Delay and on the keypad press 10.000000, then m followed by
ENTER).
b. Check long-term sample rate and delay time accuracies against limits:
H CHECK that the rising edge of the marker (or sine wave) crosses the
center horizontal graticule line at a point within ±0.75 divisions of
the center graticule. See Figure 4--25 on page 4--59.
H Enter the number of divisions on the test record.

4- 58 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Performance Tests

Align the trigger T to the

center graticule line. 1

Check long-term sample

rates and delay time 4
accuracies against limits.

Set horizontal mode. 2

3
Set horizontal scale
and delayed time.

Figure 4- 25: Measurement of accuracy - long-term and delay time

3. Disconnect the hookup: Disconnect the cable from the generator output at
the input connector of CH 1.
4. Install the test hookup and preset the instrument controls:
a. Hook up the test-signal source: Connect, through a 50 Ω precision
coaxial cable, the input of CH 1 and REF OUT.
b. Initialize the oscilloscope: Press the DEFAULT SETUP button.
5. Confirm reference is within limits for logic levels:

a. Display the test signal:

H Set the Vertical SCALE to 1 V.
H Use the Vertical POSITION knob to center the display on screen.
b. Measure logic levels:
H From the button bar, touch MEAS and select the Ampl tab.
H Touch the High and Low buttons.

H Touch the Close button.

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 4- 59

Performance Tests

c. Check REF OUT output against limits: CHECK that the CH 1 High
readout is ≥1.0 volt and that the CH 1 Low readout ≤0.25 volts. Enter
the measurements on the test record.
6. Disconnect the hookup: Disconnect the cable from the oscilloscope.

TDS7000 oscilloscope
Sine-wave
generator

Output

50 Ω coaxial cable

Figure 4- 26: Initial test hookup for external reference

7. Install the test hookup and preset the instrument controls:

a. Initialize the oscilloscope: Press the DEFAULT SETUP button.

b. Hook up the test-signal source: Connect, through a 50 Ω precision
coaxial cable, the output of the sine wave generator to CH 1 input (see
Figure 4--26).
H From the button bar, touch MEAS and select the Ampl tab.

H Touch the Pk-Pk button.

H Touch the Close button.
H Set the Vertical SCALE to 50 mV.
H Set the generator for a 10.0 MHz sine wave.
H Set the generator to output a 4 division signal. Adjust the output
until the Pk-Pk readout displays 200 mV.
c. Set the oscilloscope controls:
H Move the cable from the CH 1 input to the rear-panel Ext Ref input
(see Figure 4--27).

H Touch Menu to select menu mode.

H Touch Utilities and select External Signals.

4- 60 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Performance Tests

H Touch the Internal button to select the external reference (the button
name changes to External).

TDS7000 oscilloscope
Sine-wave
generator

Output

50 Ω coaxial cable

Figure 4- 27: Final test hookup for external reference input

8. Confirm external reference:

a. Perform a signal path compensation:
H Touch Utilities and select Instrument Calibration.
H Touch Calibrate and wait for the signal path compensation to finish.
b. Check the completion status: If the Status is Fail, refer the instrument to
qualified service personnel.
9. Disconnect the hookup:
a. Disconnect all test equipment from the oscilloscope.
b. Set the oscilloscope controls:

H Touch Menu to select menu mode.

H Touch Utilities and select External Signals.
H Touch the External button to select the internal reference (the button
name changes to Internal).
c. Perform a signal path compensation:

H Touch Utilities and select Instrument Calibration.

H Touch Calibrate and wait for the signal path compensation to finish.

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 4- 61

Performance Tests

Check Delta Time Equipment One 50 Ω, precision coaxial cable (Item 4)

Measurement Accuracy required
One Connector, BNC “T”, male BNC-to-dual female BNC (Item 6)
One Pulse Generator, Fluke 9500B or equivalent (Item 19)
Two 50 Ω, coaxial cable, male-to-male SMA connectors (Item 20)
One SMA female to BNC male connector (Item 22)
One BNC elbow connector (Item 23)
One SMA “T”, male to two SMA female connectors (Item 21)
Two SMA terminator connectors, short circuit, (Item 24)
One 2X attenuator, 50 Ω, female BNC-to- male BNC (Item 25)
Prerequisites See page 4-- 27

This procedure checks the “sample rate” portion of the Delta Time Measurement
Accuracy as listed in Specifications. The previous procedure, Check Accuracy
for Long-Term Sample Rate and Delay Time Accuracy and Reference, see
page 4--57, verified the “PPM” portion of the delta time specification.

TDS7000 oscilloscope
Pulse
generator

SMA male
to male SMA short
Output

20I 50 Ω cable
SMA male
BNC 90° female to SMA T to male SMA short
male adapter connector
BNC T
50 Ω cable connector 20I 50 Ω cable
2X attenuator BNC to SMA
adapter

Figure 4- 28: Delta time accuracy test hookup

1. Install the test hookup and preset the instrument controls:

a. Initialize the oscilloscope: Press the DEFAULT SETUP button.

4- 62 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Performance Tests

b. Hook up the pulse generator (see Figure 4--28 on page 4--62):

H Connect the pulse generator output to a 50 Ω precision coaxial cable
followed by a 90° right-angle female to male BNC adapter, then a
50 Ω 2X attenuator. The attenuator is connected to one side of the
female BNC T connector. The other side of the BNC T is connected
to BNC male to SMA adapter. The SMA side is connected to the
male side of the SMA T connector. (Keep the distance between the
BNC T and SMA T as short as possible). Connect 20 inch 50 Ω
coaxial cables to each female side of the SMA T connector. Connect
a female to female SMA adapter to both male coaxial connectors.
Connect the SMA short, to the remaining female SMA adapter. Now
connect the male BNC T connector to CH 1.
H Set the pulse generator output for a positive-going pulse with a
rise-time as shown in Table 4--9 on page 4--64 for your oscilloscope,
and for the fastest possible rep rate (at least 1 kHz).
H Set the pulse generator output for about 500 mV. (This amplitude
can be adjusted later to get a 5-division pulse on screen.)
c. Modify the initialized front-panel control settings:
H From the button bar, touch the Vert button. Set the termination of
the channel to 50 Ω by selecting the channel tab and touching the
Termination 50 Ω button.
H Press AUTOSET. You may see both positive and negative pulses.
Adjust the Trigger LEVEL knob so the trigger level is about 50% of
the rising edge of the positive pulse.
H From the button bar, touch the Horiz button and select the Acquisi-
tion tab. Touch the Real Time Only RT button.
H Set the horizontal SCALE to 5 or 10 ns/division. The pulse width
should be about 6 ns.
H Adjust oscilloscope vertical scale and position as necessary to obtain
at least 5 divisions of the positive pulse.

NOTE. If you have followed the procedure, you should have a 250 mV pulse
displayed on screen. Later in this procedure you will set the instrument to
measure the pulse width at the 150 mV level.
If the pulse you supply to the instrument is not a 250 mV pulse, you may need to
set the reference level (MidRef) to something other than 150 mV. Set the
reference level near the center of the pulse, above any noise, and below any
overshoot or ringing on the pulse.

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 4- 63

Performance Tests

d. Set up for statistics measurements:

H Press RUN/STOP button to freeze the display.
H Touch MEAS and select the Time tab to bring up the Time
Measurements menu.

H Touch the Pos Width button.

H Touch Setup Statistics. Touch the Measurement Statistics All button
and then touch Reset to reset the statistics.
H Touch Weight n=. On the keypad press 1000, then ENTER. Touch
Setup.
H Touch Setup Ref Levs and then touch Absolute.
H Touch MidRef. Using the keypad or multipurpose knobs, set the
mid reference to 150 mV. Touch Enter and then Close.
H Press the RUN/STOP button to start the acquisitions.
H Wait about 30 seconds.
H Press RUN/STOP button to freeze the display.
H Record the all statistics values.
H Calculate the difference of the Maximum (M) minus the mean (
).
H Calculate the difference of the mean (
) minus the Minimum (m).
H Both differences must be less than or equal to the Delta-time
accuracy limit shown in Table 4--9 for your oscilloscope.
H Enter pass/fail result for delta time on the test record.

Table 4- 9: Delta time measurement

Pulse generator rise

Oscilloscope type time range Delta time accuracy limit
TDS7104 >140 ps <400 ps ≤0.030 ns
TDS7054 >280 ps <800 ps ≤0.060 ns

e. Repeat for all other channels:

H Note the Vertical SCALE setting of the channel just confirmed.
H Press the Vertical channel button for the channel just confirmed to
remove the channel from display.

4- 64 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Performance Tests

H Touch MEAS and the Clear to remove the measurement.

H Press the front-panel button that corresponds to the channel you are
to confirm.
H Set Vertical SCALE to the setting noted in step e, first bullet.

H Press the Trigger SOURCE button to toggle the source to the

channel selected.
H Move the test hookup to the channel you selected.
H From the button bar, touch the Vert button. Set the termination of
the channel to 50 Ω by selecting the channel tab and touching the
Termination 50 Ω button

H Press RUN/STOP button to start the display.

H Repeat step d.
2. Disconnect all test equipment from the oscilloscope.

Trigger System Checks

These procedures check those characteristics that relate to the trigger system and
are listed as checked in Specifications.

Check Time Accuracy for Equipment One sine wave generator (Item 12)
Pulse, Glitch, Timeout, required
One 10X attenuator (Item 1)
and Width Triggering
One 50 Ω, precision coaxial cable (Item 4)
Prerequisites See page 4-- 27

1. Install the test hookup and preset the instrument controls:

a. Initialize the instrument: Press the DEFAULT SETUP button.
b. Modify the default setup:
H Set the horizontal SCALE to 10 ns.

H From the button bar, touch the Vert button. Touch the Termination
50 Ω button.
c. Hook up the test-signal source: Connect the output of the sine wave
generator (Item 12) to CH 1.

Do this through a 50 Ω precision coaxial cable, followed by a 10X

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 4- 65

Performance Tests

attenuator. See Figure 4--29. The 10X attenuator is optional if the SG503
is used.

TDS7000 oscilloscope

Sine wave generator

Output

10X attenuator

50 Ω coaxial cable

Figure 4- 29: Initial test hookup

2. Confirm the trigger system is within time-accuracy limits for pulse-glitch or

pulse-width triggering (time range ≤500 ns):
a. Display the test signal: Set the output of the sine wave generator for a
100 MHz, five-division sine wave on screen. Press PUSH TO
SET 50%.
b. Set the trigger mode: Press the Trigger MODE button to toggle it to
NORMAL.
c. Set upper and lower limits that ensure triggering: See Figure 4--30.
H Press the front-panel ADVANCED button and select the A Event
tab; then select width triggering by touching the Width button.

4- 66 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Performance Tests

Set upper and lower

limits that ensure
triggering. Then
change limits until
triggering stops.

Figure 4- 30: Measurement of time accuracy for pulse and glitch triggering

H Touch the Trig When button and select Inside limits.

H Touch Upper Limit and use the keyboard to set the upper limit to
10 ns: press 10, then n, and ENTER.
H Touch Lower Limit and use the keypad to set the lower limit to
2 ns.
d. Change limits until triggering stops:
H Press PUSH TO SET 50%.

H While doing the following subparts, monitor the display (it will stop
acquiring) and the front-panel light TRIG’D (it will extinguish) to
determine when triggering is lost.
H Use the multipurpose knob to increase the Lower Limit readout
until triggering is lost.
H CHECK that the Lower Limit readout, after the oscilloscope loses
triggering, is within 3.5 ns to 6.5 ns, inclusive.
H Enter the time on the test record.
H Use the keypad to return the Lower Limit to 2 ns and reestablish
triggering.
H Touch Upper Limit; then use the multipurpose knob to slowly
decrease the Upper Limit readout until triggering is lost.
H CHECK that the Upper Limit readout, after the oscilloscope loses
triggering, is within 3.5 ns to 6.5 ns, inclusive.

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 4- 67

Performance Tests

H Enter the time on the test record.

3. Confirm the trigger system is within time-accuracy limits for pulse-glitch or
pulse-width triggering (time range >520 ns):
a. Set upper and lower limits that ensure triggering at 250 kHz:

H Touch Upper Limit. Use the keyboard to set the upper limit to 4
s.
H Touch Lower Limit. Use the keypad to set the lower limit to 500 ns.
b. Display the test signal:

H Set the Horizontal SCALE to 4
s.

H Set the output of the sine wave generator for a 250 kHz,
five-division sine wave on screen. Set the Vertical SCALE to 20 mV
(the waveform will overdrive the display).
H Press PUSH TO SET LEVEL 50%.

c. Check against limits: Do the following subparts in the order listed.

H Use the multipurpose knob to increase the Lower Limit readout
until triggering is lost.
H CHECK that the Lower Limit readout, after the oscilloscope stops
triggering, is within 1.9
s to 2.1
s, inclusive.
H Enter the time on the test record.
H Use the keypad to return the Lower Limit to 500 ns and reestablish
triggering.
H Touch Upper Limit; then use the multipurpose knob to slowly
decrease the Upper Limit readout until triggering stops.
H CHECK that the Upper Limit readout, after the oscilloscope loses
triggering, is within 1.9
s to 2.1
s, inclusive.
H Enter the time on the test record.
4. Disconnect the hookup: Disconnect the cable from the generator output at
the input connector of CH 1.

4- 68 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Performance Tests

Check Sensitivity, Edge Equipment One sine wave generator (Item 12)
Trigger, DC Coupled required
Two precision 50 Ω coaxial cables (Item 4)
One 50 Ω terminator (Item 3)
One 10X attenuator (Item 1)
One BNC T connector (Item 6)
One 5X attenuator (Item 2)
Prerequisites See page 4-- 27.

1. Install the test hookup and preset the instrument controls:

a. Initialize the oscilloscope: Press the DEFAULT SETUP button.
b. Modify the initialized front-panel control settings:
H Set the Horizontal SCALE to 20 ns.

H Press the Trigger MODE button to toggle it to Normal.

H From the button bar, touch the Vert button. Touch the Termination
50 Ω button.
H From the tool bar, touch Horiz and select the Acquisition tab.
H Touch Average and set the number of averages to 16.
H Touch the Equivalent Time ET button.
c. Hook up the test-signal source:

H Connect the signal output of the generator to a BNC T connector.

Connect one output of the T connector to CH 1 through a 50 Ω
precision coaxial cable. Connect the other output of the T connector
to the AUX INPUT through a 50 Ω precision coaxial cable and a
50 Ω terminator. See Figure 4--31.

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 4- 69

Performance Tests

TDS7000 oscilloscope
Sine wave
generator
To AUX IN and 50 Ω
terminator

Figure 4- 31: Initial test hookup

2. Confirm the trigger system is within sensitivity limits (50 MHz):

a. Display the test signal:
H Set the generator frequency to 50 MHz.
H From the button bar, touch MEAS.
H Touch Setup Ref Levs; then touch the Min-Max button.

H Touch the Setup button and select the Ampl tab; then touch the
Amplitude button.
H Touch Close.
H Press PUSH TO SET 50%.
H Set the test signal amplitude for about three and a half divisions on
screen. Now fine adjust the generator output until the CH 1
Amplitude readout indicates the amplitude is 350 mV. Readout may
fluctuate around 350 mV.
H Disconnect the 50 Ω precision coaxial cable at CH 1 and reconnect
it to CH 1 through a 10X attenuator.
b. Check the Main trigger system for stable triggering at limits:
H Read the following definition: A stable trigger is one that is
consistent; that is, one that results in a uniform, regular display
triggered on the selected slope (positive or negative). This display
should not have its trigger point switching between opposite slopes,
nor should it roll across the screen. At horizontal scale settings of
2 ms/division and faster, TRIG’D will remain constantly lighted. It
will flash for slower settings.
H Press the Trigger Slope button to select the positive slope.

4- 70 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Performance Tests

H Adjust the Trigger LEVEL knob so that there is a stable trigger.

CHECK that the trigger is stable for the test waveform on the
positive slope.
H Press the Trigger SLOPE button to select the negative slope. Adjust
the Trigger LEVEL knob so that there is a stable trigger.
H CHECK that the trigger is stable for the test waveform on the
negative slope.
H Enter pass/fail result for trigger on the test record.
H Leave the trigger system triggered on the positive slope of the
waveform before continuing to the next step.

Check if stable trigger.

Figure 4- 32: Measurement of trigger sensitivity - 50 MHz results shown

c. Check Delayed trigger system for stable triggering at limits: Do the

following subparts in the order listed.
H From the button bar touch Trig, select the A Event tab, and set the
Source to Line.

H Select the A-->B Seq tab, and touch the A then B Trig After Time
button.
H Select the B Event tab, and touch the Set 50% button.
CHECK that a stable trigger is obtained for the test waveform for
both the positive and negative slopes of the waveform. Use the
TRIGGER LEVEL knob to stabilize the Main trigger. Touch B Trig
Level and use the keypad or the multipurpose knob/FINE button to

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 4- 71

Performance Tests

stabilize the Delayed trigger. Touch one of the Slope buttons to

switch between trigger slopes. See Figure 4--32 on page 4--71.
H Enter pass/fail result for delayed trigger on the test record.
H Leave the Delayed trigger system triggered on the positive slope of
the waveform before continuing to the next step. Also, return to the
main trigger: select the A-->B Seq tab and touch the A-->B Sequence
A Only button. Then select the A Event tab.
H Press Close.
3. Confirm the AUX Trigger input:
a. Display the test signal:

H Remove the 10X attenuator and reconnect the cable to CH 1.

H Press the Trigger SOURCE button to toggle it to CH 1.
H Set the test signal amplitude for about 4 divisions on screen.
H Set the signal amplitude as follows:
TDS7104 2.5 divisions
TDS7054 4 divisions
H Now fine adjust the generator output until the CH 1 Amplitude
readout indicates the amplitude is as follows (Readout may
fluctuate):
TDS7104 250 mV
TDS7054 400 mV
b. Check the AUX trigger source for stable triggering at limits: Do the
following in the order listed.
H Use the definition for stable trigger from step 2b.
H Press the Trigger SOURCE button to toggle it to EXT.

H Press PUSH TO SET 50%.

H CHECK that a stable trigger is obtained for the test waveform on
both the positive and negative slopes. Press the Trigger SLOPE
button to switch between trigger slopes. Use the Trigger LEVEL
knob to stabilize the trigger if required.
H Enter the pass/fail result on the test record.
H Leave the trigger system triggered on the positive slope of the
waveform before proceeding to the next check.

4- 72 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Performance Tests

H Press the Trigger SOURCE button to toggle it to CH 1.

4. Confirm that the trigger system is within sensitivity limits (full bandwidth):
a. Set the Horizontal Scale: Set the Horizontal SCALE to 500 ps.

b. Display the test signal:

H Set the generator frequency to full bandwidth as follows:
TDS7104 1 GHz
TDS7054 500 MHz
H Set the test signal amplitude for about five divisions on screen. Now
fine adjust the generator output until the CH 1 Amplitude readout
indicates the amplitude is 500 mV. (Readout may fluctuate around
500 mV).
H Disconnect the leveling head at CH 1 and reconnect it to CH 1
through a 5X attenuator. Check that a stable trigger is obtained.
c. Repeat step 2, substeps b and c only, for the full bandwidth selected.
d. Display the test signal:
H Set the generator frequency to 100 MHz.

H Set the Horizontal SCALE to 10 ns.

H Remove the 5X attenuator and reconnect the cable to CH 1.
H Set the generator amplitude on screen as follows:
TDS7104 5 divisions
TDS7054 7.5 divisions
H Now fine adjust the generator output until the CH 1 Amplitude
readout indicates the amplitude is as follows (Readout may
fluctuate):
TDS7104 500 mV
TDS7054 750 mV
e. Repeat step 3, substeps b only, for the full bandwidth selected.

NOTE. You just checked the trigger sensitivity. If desired, you may repeat steps 1
through 4c for the other channels (CH 2, CH 3, and CH 4).

5. Disconnect the hookup: Disconnect the cables from AUX IN and from the
channel last tested.

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 4- 73

Performance Tests

Output Signal Checks

The procedure that follows checks those characteristics of the output signals that
are listed as checked under Warranted Characteristics in Specifications.

Check Outputs — CH 3 Equipment Two precision 50 Ω coaxial cables (Item 4)

Signal Out and required
One calibration generator (Item 10)
Aux Trigger Out
Prerequisites See page 4-- 27. Also, the oscilloscope must have passed Check DC
Voltage Measurement Accuracy on page 4-- 35.

1. Install the test hookup and preset the instrument controls:

TDS7000 oscilloscope
Calibration
generator

To AUX OUT

50 Ω coaxial cables

Figure 4- 33: Initial test hookup

a. Hook up test-signal source 1 (See Figure 4--33):

H Connect the standard amplitude output of a calibration generator
through a 50 Ω precision coaxial cable to CH 3.
H Set the calibration generator to output a 0.500 V square wave.
b. Hook up test-signal source 2: Connect the Aux Out at the front panel to
CH 2 through a 50 Ω precision cable.
c. Initialize the oscilloscope: Press the DEFAULT SETUP button.
d. Modify the initialized front-panel control settings:
H Press the Vertical CH 1 button to toggle it off.
H Press the Vertical CH 3 button to display that channel.
H Push Trigger Source to toggle the source to CH 3.

4- 74 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Performance Tests

H Set the Horizontal SCALE to 200
s.

H If necessary, adjust the calibration generator output for 5 divisions of
amplitude. (For oscilloscopes with 50 Ω inputs, you may need to
double the output of the generator to get 5 divisions of amplitude.)
H From the tool bar, touch Horiz and select the Acquisition tab.

H Touch Average and set the number of averages to 64.

H Touch the Close button.
2. Confirm AUX OUT is within limits for logic levels:
a. Display the test signal:
H Press the Vertical CH 3 button to turn off CH 3.
H Press the Vertical CH 2 button to display that channel.
H Set the Vertical SCALE to 1 V.
H Use the Vertical POSITION knob to center the display on screen.
b. Measure logic levels:

H From the button bar, touch MEAS and select the Ampl tab.
H Touch the High and Low buttons.
H Touch the Close button.
c. Check AUX OUT output against limits:
H CHECK that the CH 2 High readout is ≥2.5 volts and that the CH 2
Low readout is ≤0.7 volts. See Figure 4--34.
H Enter the high and low voltages on the test record.
H From the button bar, touch the Vert button. Touch the Termination
50 Ω button.
H CHECK that the CH 2 High readout is ≥1.0 volt and that the CH 2
Low readout ≤0.25 volts.
H Enter the high and low voltages on the test record.

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 4- 75

Performance Tests

Check output

Figure 4- 34: Measurement of main trigger out limits

3. Confirm SIGNAL OUT is within limits for gain:

a. Measure gain:
H Move the precision 50 Ω cable from the AUX OUT BNC to the
SIGNAL OUT BNC.
H Set Vertical SCALE to 100 mV.
H Press PUSH TO SET 50%.
H From the button bar, touch MEAS and select the Ampl tab.
H Touch the Pk-Pk button.
H Touch Close.

b. Check against limits:

H From the button bar, touch the Vert button. Touch the Termination
1 MΩ button.
H CHECK that the readout Ch2 Pk-Pk is between 80 mV and 120 mV,
inclusive.

H Enter the voltage on the test record.

H From the button bar, touch the Vert button. Touch the Termination
50 Ω button.
H Touch Close.

4- 76 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Performance Tests

H CHECK that the readout CH 2 Pk-Pk is between 44 mV and 66 mV,

inclusive.
H Enter voltage on test record.
4. Disconnect the hookup: Disconnect the cables from the channel inputs and
the rear panel outputs.

Check Probe Equipment Two dual-banana connectors (Item 6)

Compensation Output required
One BNC T connector (Item 7)
Two precision 50 Ω coaxial cables (Item 4)
One DC calibration generator (Item 9)
Prerequisites See page 4-- 27. Also, the oscilloscope must have passed Check
Long-Term Sample Rate and Delay Time Accuracy and Reference on
page 4-- 57.

1. Install the test hookup and preset the instrument controls:

a. Hook up test-signal:
H Connect one of the 50 Ω cables to CH 1. See Figure 4--35.

H Connect the other end of the cable just installed to the PROBE
COMPENSATION input. See Figure 4--35.

TDS7000 oscilloscope

BNC cable from PROBE

COMPENSATION output
to CH 1 input

Figure 4- 35: Initial test hookup

b. Initialize the oscilloscope: Press the DEFAULT SETUP button.

c. Modify the initialized front-panel control settings:
H Set the Vertical SCALE to 200 mV.

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 4- 77

Performance Tests

H Set the Horizontal SCALE to 200
s.

H Press PUSH TO SET 50%.
H Use the Vertical POSITION knob to center the display on screen.

H From the tool bar, touch Horiz and select the Acquisition tab.
H Touch Average and set the number of averages to 128.
2. Confirm that the Probe Compensator signal is within limits for frequency:

a. Measure the frequency of the probe compensation signal:

H From the button bar, touch MEAS and select the Time tab.
H Touch the Freq button.
b. Check against limits:
H CHECK that the CH 1 Freq readout is within 950 Hz to 1.050 kHz,
inclusive. See Figure 4--36.
H Enter the frequency on the test record.

H Touch Clear to remove the measurement.

Figure 4- 36: Measurement of probe compensator frequency

c. Save the probe compensation signal in reference memory:

H Touch Refs; then select the Ref 1 tab.

4- 78 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Performance Tests

H Touch the Save Wfm to Ref1 Save button to save the probe
compensation signal in reference 1.
H Disconnect the cable from CH 1 and the probe compensation
connector.
H Touch the Display button to toggle it to on to displayed the stored
signal.
d. Hook up the DC standard source:
H Set the output of a DC calibration generator to off or 0 volts.
H Connect the output of a DC calibration generator through a
dual-banana connector followed by a 50 Ω precision coaxial cable to
one side of a BNC T connector. See Figure 4--37.

H Connect the Sense input of the generator through a second dual-ba-

nana connector followed by a 50 Ω precision coaxial cable to the
other side of the BNC T connector. Now connect the BNC T
connector to CH 1. See Figure 4--37.

TDS7000 oscilloscope

DC calibrator

Dual banana to
BNC adapters

BNC T
connector
50 Ω coaxial cables

Figure 4- 37: Subsequent test hookup

e. Measure amplitude of the probe compensation signal:

H From the tool bar, touch Horiz and select the Acquisition tab.
H Touch Average and set the number of averages to 16 using the
keypad or the multipurpose knob.
H Adjust the output of the DC calibration generator until it precisely
overlaps the top (upper) level of the stored probe compensation
signal. (This value will be near 1000 mV).

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 4- 79

Performance Tests

H Record the setting of the DC generator.

H Adjust the output of the DC calibration generator until it precisely
overlaps the base (lower) level of the stored probe compensation
signal. (This value will be near zero volts).
H Record the setting of the DC generator.

f. Press Close to remove the menus from the display. See Figure 4--38.

Figure 4- 38: Measurement of probe compensator amplitude

g. Check against limits:

H Subtract the value just obtained (base level) from that obtained
previously (top level).

H CHECK that the difference obtained is within 990 mV to 1010 mV,

inclusive.
H Enter voltage difference on test record.
3. Disconnect the hookup: Disconnect the cable from CH 1.

4- 80 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Performance Tests

Sine Wave Generator Leveling Procedure

Some procedures in this manual require a sine wave generator to produce the
necessary test signals. If you do not have a leveled sine wave generator, use one
of the following procedures to level the output amplitude of your sine
wave generator.

Equipment Sine wave generator (Item 12)

required
Level meter and power sensor (Item 13)
Power divider (Item 14)
Two male N to female BNC adapters (Item 15)
One precision coaxial cable (Item 4)
Prerequisites See page 4-- 27

TDS7000 oscilloscope
Sine wave
generator Level meter

Input

Power divider
Output
Attenuators
(if necessary)

Power sensor

Figure 4- 39: Sine wave generator leveling equipment setup

1. Install the test hookup: Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 4--39.
2. Set the Generator:
H Set the sine wave generator to a reference frequency of 10 MHz.

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 4- 81

Performance Tests

H Adjust the sine wave generator amplitude to the required number of

divisions as measured by the oscilloscope.
3. Record the reference level: Note the reading on the level meter.
4. Set the generator to the new frequency and reference level:

H Change the sine wave generator to the desired new frequency.

H Input the correction factor and/or the new frequency into the level
meter.
H Adjust the sine wave generator amplitude until the level meter again
reads the value noted in step 3. The signal amplitude is now
correctly set for the new frequency.

Equipment Sine wave generator (Item 12)

required
Level meter and power sensor (Item 13)
Two male N to female BNC adapters (Item 15)
Two precision coaxial cables (Item 4)
Prerequisites See page 4-- 27

1. Install the test hookup: Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 4--40
(start with the sine wave generator connected to the oscilloscope).
2. Set the Generator:

H Set the sine wave generator to a reference frequency of 10 MHz.

H Adjust the sine wave generator amplitude to the required number of
divisions as measured by the oscilloscope.

4- 82 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Performance Tests

TDS7000 oscilloscope

Sine wave
generator

Output

Level meter
Connect the sine wave
generator to the
oscilloscope and the
Power sensor power sensor as
directed in the text.

Input

Figure 4- 40: Equipment setup for maximum amplitude

3. Record the reference level:

H Disconnect the sine wave generator from the oscilloscope.
H Connect the sine wave generator to the power sensor.
H Note the level meter reading.
4. Set the generator to the new frequency and reference level:

H Change the sine wave generator to the desired new frequency.

H Input the correction factor and/or the new frequency into the level meter.
H Adjust the sine wave generator amplitude until the level meter again
reads the value noted in step 3. The signal amplitude is now correctly set
for the new frequency.

H Disconnect the sine wave generator from the power sensor.

H Connect the sine wave generator to the oscilloscope.

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 4- 83

Performance Tests

4- 84 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

Adjustment Procedures

This chapter contains an automatic adjustment procedure for your oscilloscope.

The purpose of this procedure is to return the oscilloscope to conformance to its
specifications.

Adjustment Interval The voltage and timing references inside the oscilloscope are very stable
over time and should not need routine adjustment. Before performing the
procedures in this chapter, first verify that the oscilloscope does not meet
specifications. Refer to Performance Tests on page 4--17 for a procedure to verify
the specifications.
If periodic calibration is one of your requirements, a general rule is to verify
performance and make adjustments (only if needed) every 2000 hours of
operation or once a year if the oscilloscope is used infrequently.

Adjustment Environment The oscilloscope must be adjusted in a 20 °C to 30 °C ambient temperature

environment. The oscilloscope and signal source must warm up at least 20
minutes in this environment before you begin the adjustment procedure.

Adjustment Dependencies Some adjustments are dependent upon others. The automatic adjustment
procedure performs the adjustments in an appropriate sequence to eliminate
dependency problems. Always execute the complete automatic adjustment
procedure. The total time to execute the procedure is approximately 30 minutes
(depending somewhat on the processor speed of the controller and the type of
GPIB controller — USB is much slower).

Adjustment After Repair After removal and replacement of a module due to electrical failure, you must
either perform the adjustment procedure or not, depending on the module
replaced. See Table 5--1.

Table 5- 1: Adjustments required for module

replaced

Module replaced Adjustment required

Front panel assembly No
Acquisition board Yes
Processor board No
NLX processor assembly No
Display panel or display No
system

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 5- 1

Adjustment Procedures

Table 5- 1: Adjustments required for module

replaced (Cont.)

Module replaced Adjustment required

Power supply Only if performance verifica-
tion procedure fails
Interconnect boards No
Fans No

Required Equipment The adjustment procedure requires the specific test equipment and materials
listed in Table 5--2.

Table 5- 2: Required equipment and materials

Category Specific equipment required Quantity

Signal source Fluke 9500B Oscilloscope Calibrator, with Option 100 1 ea
(high-stability time base)
Fluke 9520 or 9530 Standard Output Module 5 ea
Instrument PC-compatible computer with National Instruments 1 ea
controller GPIB Controller card and National Instruments NI-488.2
(only one of for Windows software, running Windows 95/98 or NT
these configura-
configura
tions required) National Instruments PCMCIA GPIB Controller card for
Windows 98 and National Instruments NI-488.2 for
Windows software (to install in the TDS7000)
National Instruments USB GPIB Controller card for
Windows 98 and National Instruments NI-488.2 for
Windows software (to install in the TDS7000) 1
Test software Setup.exe, located on the Product Disk CD-ROM that is 1 ea
included as standard equipment with the oscilloscope
Setup.exe, located on the Adjustment Software disk that 1 ea
is included with this manual
GPIB cables GPIB cable, 1 m minimum length, Tektronix part number 2 (for separate
002-0991-01 or similar controller), 1 (for
oscilloscope con-
troller)
1 Depending on other USB devices attached to the oscilloscope, a USB hub may also
be required. Consult your National Instruments documentation for more information.

5- 2 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Adjustment Procedures

Overview of the Procedure

To perform this procedure you must have the specific equipment listed in
Table 5--2. You can use a separate computer as the instrument controller, or you
can install a GPIB controller card into the oscilloscope and use the PC that is
built into the oscilloscope as the controller. If you use the oscilloscope as the
controller, you must also have a keyboard and mouse attached to the oscilloscope
to operate the test program.
After the controller is set up, you need to install the performance verification test
program from a CD-ROM that was shipped with the oscilloscope. An installa-
tion wizard will assist you with the installation of the test program.
After the performance verification test program is installed, you need to install
the adjustment program contained on the CD that is included with this manual.
The adjustment program adds the adjustment procedure to the performance
verification test program. Once the adjustment program is installed, you can run
either the performance verification or adjustment procedures.
When you start the test program a screen of introductory information is
displayed that contains instructions, a text entry line, and function buttons. You
use these controls to navigate through the steps of the test program. You can
either click (or touch) the function buttons in the screen or use the function keys
on the keyboard. The keyboard is required for text entry. One of the initial
screens asks you to choose whether you want to execute the performance
verification or the adjustment procedure.

The adjustment procedure is fully automated. Once the program is started, all of
steps will run without manual intervention (CHAN_DELAY_CAL may require
manual intervention). The overall time to complete the adjustment is about 30
minutes. Every 30 days or when a head on the base unit is changed, a head skew
table is generated and will require moving the heads between channels.

When the adjustment is complete, you can save or print a report that lists the test
names and their exit status. The test report is an ACSII text file written to the
directory C:\tekcats\rpt\. The filename of the report is <oscilloscope
model>.<serial number>. If you have previously run the performance
verification procedure, the adjustment results are appended to the end of the
existing report file.

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 5- 3

Adjustment Procedures

Instrumentation Setup
Before you can execute the adjustment program, you need to set up and
configure the instrumentation. Make connections according to the following
diagrams. If you are using a separate computer as the controller, see Figure 5--1.
If you are using the oscilloscope as a controller, see Figure 5--2.

GPIB cables daisy chained onto

the oscilloscope GPIB connector

GPIB cable GPIB cable

Oscilloscope
Controller

Connect Fluke 9520 or

9530 output modules
to the oscilloscope
CH1 through CH 4
inputs as shown

Fluke 9500B

Connecting the fifth output module to

the oscilloscope is only required when
prompted to connect the head by the
adjustment program

Figure 5- 1: Adjustment setup using a separate controller

5- 4 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Adjustment Procedures

GPIB cables daisy chained onto

the oscilloscope GPIB connector

GPIB cable GPIB cable

Oscilloscope
GPIB cable from
PCMCIA or USB
GBIP card Connect Fluke 9520 or
9530 output modules
to the oscilloscope
CH1 through CH 4
inputs as shown

Fluke 9500B

Connecting the fifth output

module to the oscilloscope is
only required when prompted
to connect the head by the
adjustment program

Figure 5- 2: Adjustment setup using the oscilloscope as the controller

Once the connections have been made, follow these steps:

NOTE. If you have just completed the performance verification procedure, you
can skip all the following steps in this setup procedure.

1. Power on the instruments: Turn power for the controller, oscilloscope, and
signal source on. The oscilloscope and the signal source must warm up for
20 minutes before you can begin to execute the test. However, while you are
waiting you can continue with the next steps in this procedure.
2. Check the Fluke 9500B GPIB address: Refer to the Fluke 9500B documenta-
tion for information about setting the GPIB address. If the address is set to 0
or 1, change it to an address between 2 and 30 (inclusive). Make a note of
the address setting for use later in this procedure.
3. Set the GPIB address of the oscilloscope.

a. If the oscilloscope powered on in the toolbar mode (the default mode),

click the Menu button (upper right corner of the display) to put the
oscilloscope in menu-bar mode. In menu-bar mode, you should then see
a PC-style menu bar across the top of the display.
b. Pull down the Utility menu and then select GPIB Configuration . . . .
This command will display the GPIB Configuration control window.

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 5- 5

Adjustment Procedures

c. In the GPIB Configuration control window, click the Talk/Listen button

to select Talk/Listen mode.
d. Touch the Address readout and then click the up and down arrows or the
upper multipurpose knob to set the GPIB address to 1.
e. Click the Close button to close the control window.

4. If you are using a separate PC as the controller, do step 5 and its substeps
and then skip step 6. If you are using the oscilloscope as the controller, skip
step 5 and then do step 6 and its substeps.
5. Configure the PC controller: Perform these steps if you are using a separate
PC as the controller. Use the GPIB software and hardware on the controller
as necessary to make the following settings:
a. Set the controller GPIB address to 0.
b. Define GPIB devices and their addresses for compatibility with the test
program as shown in Table 5--3.

Table 5- 3: GPIB devices required by test

program

Device name GPIB address

<controller> 0
DUT1 1
SG1 Set each address to that of
the Fluke 9500B
FG1
AUX1
PS1
PG1
RT1

6. Configure the oscilloscope controller: Perform these steps if you are using
the oscilloscope as the controller.

NOTE. If you use the USB port, this procedure will take much longer.

5- 6 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Adjustment Procedures

a. If using a PCMCIA card, do these steps.

Disable the ATI 3D Rage Pro display adapter (the NLX SVGA display
adapter): right click on My Computer, select Properties, select the
Device Manager tab and then the View devices by type button, click the
+ box on Display adapters, click the ATI 3D Rage Pro entry, click the
Properties button, and then click Disable in this hardware profile, click
the OK button, and then click the Close button.
Run msconfig: on the msconfig General tab, click the Advanced button,
check EMM Exclude A000 -- FFFF, click the OK button, and then click
the OK button.
Install the GPIB software, reboot, and then install the PCMCIA GPIB
card (the PCMCIA card may not be recognized until you reboot again).
After completing the adjustment procedures, restore these settings to
their previous values.
b. On the oscilloscope, pull down the File menu and then select Minimize
to minimize the oscilloscope application. You should now see the
Windows 98 desktop.
c. In the Start menu, select Settings > Control Panel.
d. In the Control Panel, double click the System icon to display the System
Properties dialog box.
e. In the System Properties dialog box, select the Device Manager tab.
f. Find the National Instruments GPIB Interfaces icon in the list of
devices. Right click the icon and then select Properties to display the
National Instruments GPIB Interface Properties dialog box.
g. Select the Device Templates tab. You should see a dialog box similar to
the one shown in Figure 5--3.

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 5- 7

Adjustment Procedures

Figure 5- 3: National Instruments GPIB Interface Properties dialog box

h. Click on the device DEV1 in the Device Name list to select it.
i. Right click on the selection and select Rename.
j. Type in the new name DUT1.
k. Repeat the process for devices DEV2 through DEV7, renaming them
according the names in Table 5--4. These are the names that will be
recognized by the test program.

Table 5- 4: Renaming the GPIB devices

Initial name New name

DEV1 DUT1
DEV2 SG1
DEV3 FG1
DEV4 AUX1
DEV5 PS1
DEV6 PG1
DEV7 RT1

l. Click on the (new) device DUT1 in the Device Name dialog box.

m. Under DUT1 Attributes, set the Primary GPIB Address to 1.

5- 8 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Adjustment Procedures

n. Set the GPIB address for the remainder of the newly named devices to
the GPIB address of the Fluke 9500B (previously noted). The addresses
for all the devices are summarized in Table 5--5.

Table 5- 5: Setting the GPIB addresses

Device GPIB address

DUT1 1
SG1 Set each address to that of
the Fluke 9500B
FG1
AUX1
PS1
PG1
RT1

o. When the setup is complete, click OK to close the dialog box.

Adjustment Program Installation

You must install the performance verification test program before you install the
adjustment program. If you have not already installed the performance verifica-
tion test program, see Test Program Installation on page 4--22 and do those steps
first.
Follow these steps to install the adjustment program on the instrument controller.
The same steps apply whether the instrument controller is a separate PC or the
PC that is built into the oscilloscope. If you are using the PC built into the
oscilloscope as the controller, this procedure assumes that the GPIB card and
accompanying controller software are already installed and configured as
necessary.

1. Locate the adjustment program: Locate the Adjustment Software CD that is

included with this manual and insert it into the disk drive on the instrument
controller.
2. Start the installation wizard: Select Run. . . in the Start menu and then
enter D:\adjsetup.exe.
3. Follow the instructions: Follow the instructions presented by the installation
wizard to install the adjustment program.

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 5- 9

Adjustment Procedures

4. Locate the test program file: After the installation is complete, open the
directory C:\tekcats\ and then locate the file tds7000_nt.exe. This is the file
you will double click to execute either the performance verification
procedure or the adjustment procedure. The install procedure also created a
desktop shortcut (link) to this file for your convenience.

Adjustment Program Execution

Once the instrumentation is connected, configured, and has been allowed to
warm up for at least 20 minutes, you can start the adjustment program. To start
the adjustment program, select the file C:\tekcats\tds7000_nt.exe (or the
desktop shortcut).

Program execution is a matter of following the on-screen instructions. The

program contains help screens to provide additional information you may need to
know to execute the steps. When the program asks whether you want to execute
the performance verification or the adjustment procedure, select the adjustment
procedure.

5- 10 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

Maintenance

This section contains the information needed to do periodic and corrective

maintenance on the oscilloscope. The following subsections are included:

H Preventing ESD — General information on preventing damage by electros-

tatic discharge.
H Inspection and Cleaning — Information and procedures for inspecting the
oscilloscope and cleaning its external and internal modules.
H Removal and Installation Procedures — Procedures for the removal of
defective modules and replacement of new or repaired modules. Also
included is a procedure for disassembly of the oscilloscope for cleaning.
H Troubleshooting — Information for isolating failed modules. Included are
instructions for operating the oscilloscope diagnostic routines and trouble-
shooting trees. Most of the trees make use of the internal diagnostic routines
to speed fault isolation to a module.
H Repackaging Instructions — Information on returning an oscilloscope for
service.

Preventing ESD
Before servicing this product, read the Safety Summary and Introduction at the
front of the manual and the ESD information below.

CAUTION. Static discharge can damage any semiconductor component in this

oscilloscope.

When performing any service which requires internal access to the oscilloscope,
adhere to the following precautions to avoid damaging internal modules and their
components due to electrostatic discharge (ESD).
1. Minimize handling of static-sensitive circuit boards and components.
2. Transport and store static-sensitive modules in their static protected
containers or on a metal rail. Label any package that contains static-sensitive
boards.
3. Discharge the static voltage from your body by wearing a grounded antistatic
wrist strap while handling these modules. Do service of static-sensitive
modules only at a static-free work station.

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 6- 1

Maintenance

4. Nothing capable of generating or holding a static charge should be allowed

on the work station surface.
5. Handle circuit boards by the edges when possible.
6. Do not slide the circuit boards over any surface.

7. Avoid handling circuit boards in areas that have a floor or work-surface

covering capable of generating a static charge.

Inspection and Cleaning

Inspection and Cleaning describes how to inspect for dirt and damage. It also
describes how to clean the exterior and interior of the oscilloscope. Inspection
and cleaning are done as preventive maintenance. Preventive maintenance, when
done regularly, may prevent oscilloscope malfunction and enhance its reliability.
Preventive maintenance consists of visually inspecting and cleaning the
oscilloscope and using general care when operating it.
How often to do maintenance depends on the severity of the environment in
which the oscilloscope is used. A proper time to perform preventive maintenance
is just before oscilloscope adjustment.

General Care The cabinet helps keep dust out of the oscilloscope and should normally be in
place when operating the oscilloscope.

Interior Cleaning Use a dry, low-velocity stream of air to clean the interior of the chassis. Use a
soft-bristle, non-static-producing brush for cleaning around components. If you
must use a liquid for minor interior cleaning, use a 75% isopropyl alcohol
solution and rinse with deionized water.

WARNING. Before performing any procedure that follows, power off the
instrument and disconnect it from line voltage.

Exterior Cleaning Clean the exterior surfaces of the chassis with a dry lint-free cloth or a soft-
bristle brush. If any dirt remains, use a cloth or swab dipped in a 75% isopropyl
alcohol solution. Use a swab to clean narrow spaces around controls and
connectors. Do not use abrasive compounds on any part of the chassis that may
damage the chassis.
Clean the On/Standby switch using a dampened cleaning towel. Do not spray or
wet the switch directly.

6- 2 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Maintenance

CAUTION. Avoid the use of chemical cleaning agents which might damage the
plastics used in this oscilloscope. Use only deionized water when cleaning the
menu buttons or front-panel buttons. Use a 75% isopropyl alcohol solution as a
cleaner and rinse with deionized water. Before using any other type of cleaner,
consult your Tektronix Service Center or representative.

Inspection — Exterior. Inspect the outside of the oscilloscope for damage, wear,
and missing parts, using Table 6--1 as a guide. Immediately repair defects that
could cause personal injury or lead to further damage to the oscilloscope.

Table 6- 1: External inspection check list

Item Inspect for Repair action

Cabinet, front panel, Cracks, scratches, deformations, Repair or replace defective
and cover damaged hardware module
Front-panel knobs Missing, damaged, or loose Repair or replace missing or
knobs defective knobs
Connectors Broken shells, cracked insulation, Repair or replace defective
and deformed contacts. Dirt in modules. Clear or wash out dirt
connectors
Carrying handle, and Correct operation Repair or replace defective
cabinet feet module
Accessories Missing items or parts of items, Repair or replace damaged or
bent pins, broken or frayed missing items, frayed cables, and
cables, and damaged connectors defective modules

Flat Panel Display The display is a soft plastic display and must be treated with care during
Cleaning cleaning.

CAUTION. Improper cleaning agents or methods can damage the flat panel
display.
Avoid using abrasive cleaners or commercial glass cleaners to clean the display
surface.
Avoid spraying liquids directly on the display surface.
Avoid scrubbing the display with excessive force.

Clean the flat panel display surface by gently rubbing the display with a
clean-room wipe (such as Wypall Medium Duty Wipes, #05701, available from
Kimberly-Clark Corporation).

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 6- 3

Maintenance

If the display is very dirty, moisten the wipe with distilled water or a 75%
isopropyl alcohol solution and gently rub the display surface. Avoid using excess
force or you may damage the plastic display surface.

CAUTION. To prevent getting moisture inside the oscilloscope during external

cleaning, use only enough liquid to dampen the cloth or applicator.

Inspection — Interior. To access the inside of the oscilloscope for inspection and
cleaning, refer to the Removal and Installation Procedures in this section.
Inspect the internal portions of the oscilloscope for damage and wear, using
Table 6--2 as a guide. Defects found should be repaired immediately.
If any circuit board is replaced, check Table 6--2 in Section 5 to see if it is
necessary to adjust the oscilloscope.

CAUTION. To prevent damage from electrical arcing, ensure that circuit boards
and components are dry before applying power to the oscilloscope.

Table 6- 2: Internal inspection check list

Item Inspect for Repair action

Circuit boards Loose, broken, or corroded Remove and replace damaged
solder connections. Burned circuit board.
circuit boards. Burned, broken, or
cracked circuit-run plating.
Resistors Burned, cracked, broken, blis- Remove and replace damaged
tered condition. circuit board.
Solder connections Cold solder or rosin joints. Resolder joint and clean with
isopropyl alcohol.
Capacitors Damaged or leaking cases. Remove and replace damaged
Corroded solder on leads or circuit board.
terminals.
Semiconductors Loosely inserted in sockets. Firmly seat loose semiconduc-
Distorted pins. tors. Remove devices that have
distorted pins. Carefully straight-
en pins (as required to fit the
socket), using long-nose pliers,
and reinsert firmly. Ensure that
straightening action does not
crack pins, causing them to
break off.

6- 4 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Maintenance

Table 6- 2: Internal inspection check list (Cont.)

Item Inspect for Repair action

Wiring and cables Loose plugs or connectors. Firmly seat connectors. Repair or
Burned, broken, or frayed wiring. replace modules with defective
wires or cables.
Chassis Dents, deformations, and dam- Straighten, repair, or replace
aged hardware. defective hardware.

Cleaning Procedure — Interior. To clean the oscilloscope interior, do the following

steps:

1. Blow off dust with dry, low-pressure, deionized air (approximately 9 psi).
2. Remove any remaining dust with a lint-free cloth dampened in isopropyl
alcohol (75% solution) and rinse with warm deionized water. (A cotton-
tipped applicator is useful for cleaning in narrow spaces and on circuit
boards.)

STOP. If, after doing steps 1 and 2, a module is clean upon inspection, skip the
remaining steps.

3. If steps 1 and 2 do not remove all the dust or dirt, the oscilloscope may be
spray washed using a solution of 75% isopropyl alcohol by doing steps 4
through 8.
4. Gain access to the parts to be cleaned by removing easily accessible shields
and panels (see Removal and Installation Procedures).
5. Spray wash dirty parts with the isopropyl alcohol and wait 60 seconds for the
majority of the alcohol to evaporate.

6. Use hot (120 _F to 140 _F) deionized water to thoroughly rinse them.
7. Dry all parts with low-pressure, deionized air.
8. Dry all components and assemblies in an oven or drying compartment using
low-temperature (125 _F to 150 _F) circulating air.

Lubrication. There is no periodic lubrication required for this oscilloscope.

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 6- 5

Maintenance

6- 6 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

Removal and Installation Procedures

This subsection contains procedures for removal and installation of all mechani-
cal and electrical modules.

Preparation

WARNING. Before doing this or any other procedure in this manual, read the
Safety Summary found at the beginning of this manual. Also, to prevent possible
injury to service personnel or damage to the oscilloscope components, read
Installation in Section 2, and Preventing ESD in this section.

This subsection contains the following items:

H This preparatory information that you need to properly do the procedures that
follow.
H List of tools required to remove all modules.
H Procedures for removal and reinstallation of the electrical and mechanical
modules.
H A disassembly procedure for removal of all the major modules from the
oscilloscope at one time and for reassembly of those modules into the
oscilloscope. Instructions for doing the actual cleaning are found under
Inspection and Cleaning at the beginning of this section.

WARNING. Before doing any procedure in this subsection, disconnect the power
cord from the line voltage source. Failure to do so could cause serious injury or
death.

NOTE. Read Equipment Required for a list of the tools needed to remove and
install modules in this oscilloscope. See Table 6-- 3, on page 6-- 8.
Read the cleaning procedure before disassembling the oscilloscope for cleaning.

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 6-- 7

Removal and Installation Procedures

Equipment Required. Most modules in the TDS7000 Digital Oscilloscope can be

removed with a screwdriver handle mounted with a size T-15, TorxR screwdriver
tip. Use this tool whenever a procedure step instructs you to remove or install a
screw unless a different size screwdriver is specified in that step. All equipment
required to remove and reinstall each module is listed in the first step of its
procedure.

Table 6-- 3: Tools required for module removal

Item General tool

no. Name Description number
1 Screwdriver handle Accepts Torx-r bits 620-440
2 T-10 Torx tip Used for removing the electrical or 640-235
optical module chassis. Torx-bit for
T-10 size screw heads
3 T-15 Torx tip Used for removing most oscilloscope 640-247
screws. Torx-bit for T-15 size screw
heads
4 1/ inch flat-bladed Screwdriver for unlocking cable Standard tool
8
screwdriver connectors
5 #0 Phillips screwdriver Screwdriver for removing small Standard tool
Phillips screws, CD, floppy & hard
drive
6 Angle-Tip Tweezers Used to remove front panel knobs Standard tool
7 3/ inch open-end wrench Used to remove the rear panel nut Standard tool
16
posts
8 5/ inch open-end wrench Used to remove the rear panel nut Standard tool
16
posts
9 MA-800G Soldering Aid Used to remove the front panel trim Standard tool

6-- 8 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Removal and Installation Procedures

Procedures for External Modules

The following procedures are found here and are listed in order presented.
H Line Fuse and Line Cord
H Front Panel Knobs
H Trim (all)
H Bottom cover
H Left and Right covers
Line Fuses and AC power 1. Assemble equipment and locate modules to be removed: Locate the power
cord connector switch, line fuses, and AC power cord connector in Figure 6--1, on page
6--10.
2. The oscilloscope has a built-in soft power-off function that safely powers off
the oscilloscope when you press the On/Standby switch.
3. Power off the rear panel power switch before servicing the line fuse or power
cord.
4. Orient the oscilloscope: Set the oscilloscope so its bottom is down on the
work surface and its rear is facing you.
5. Remove line cord: Find the line cord on the rear cover. Pull the line cord
away to remove from the AC power connector. Reverse procedure to
reinstall.
6. Remove the line fuse: Find the fuse caps on the rear panel. Now, remove the
fuse cap by turning it counterclockwise using a flat-bladed screwdriver, and
remove the line fuse. Reverse procedure to reinstall.
7. Reinstallation: Do in reverse steps 6 and 5 to reinstall the line cord and then
the line fuse.

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 6-- 9

Removal and Installation Procedures

AC power cord
connector

AC power
cord
Power
switch Line fuses
Line fuse
holder

Figure 6-- 1: Line fuse and line cord removal

Front-Panel Knobs 1. Assemble equipment and locate modules to be removed:

2. Orient the oscilloscope: Set the oscilloscope so its bottom is down on the
work surface and its front is facing you.
3. Remove the knob(s): Grasp any knob you want to remove and pull it straight
out from the front panel 1/4 inch to create some clearance between the base of
the knob and the front panel. Insert the angled-tip tweezers between the knob
and front panel and use them to remove the knob. See Figure 6--2.
4. Reinstallation: To reinstall, align knob to shaft and push it in until it snaps.

CAUTION. To prevent damage to the encoders located on the circuit board, apply
pressure to the encoders while pushing the knob on the shaft.

6-- 10 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Removal and Installation Procedures

Figure 6-- 2: Knob removal

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 6-- 11

Removal and Installation Procedures

Trim and Carrying Handle 1. Locate module to be removed: Locate the Trim in the locator diagram. See
Figure 6--7, on page 6--18.
2. Remove the front panel trim: Use Figure 6--3, on page 6--13, as a guide.
a. To prevent the power button from falling out of the front panel trim,
place a piece of tape over the button.
b. Grasp the trim ring by its top edge and pull toward you to detach the
three plastic snaps. (Alternatively, you can use a flat-bladed screwdriver
or other small prying tool to help you detach the snaps.)
c. Swing the bottom of the ring upward and off the front panel.
3. Remove the acquisition trim: Use Figure 6--3, on page 6--13 as a guide.
a. Remove the three T-15 Torx screws that secure the acquisition trim to the
oscilloscope.
b. Remove the acquisition trim from the oscilloscope.
4. Remove the top cover trim: Use Figure 6--3, on page 6--13 as a guide.
a. Remove the accessory pouch; it snaps off.
b. Remove the four T-15 Torx screws that secure the top cover trim to the
oscilloscope. The T-15 Torx screws also secure the snap studs to the top
cover.
c. Remove the top cover trim from the oscilloscope.
5. Remove the carrying handle and the right/left side trim panels: Use
Figure 6--3, on page 6--13 as a guide.
a. Remove the T-15 Torx screws that secure the handle to the oscilloscope.
Remove the handle from the oscilloscope. During reassembly, tighten the
screws to 8 to 10 inch pounds of torque.
b. Slide the side trim panels towards the rear of the oscilloscope allowing
the tabs to clear the cover openings, then pull out to remove the panels
from the oscilloscope.
6. Reinstallation: Do in reverse steps 2 through 5 to reinstall the appropriate
trim.

6-- 12 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Removal and Installation Procedures

Snap stud (4)

T-15 Torx screw (4)
Top cover trim

Left side trim

Right side trim

Front panel trim Acquisition trim

Carrying handle
T-15 Torx screw (2)
T-15 Torx
screw (3)

Soldering aid

To remove the trim ring, slide the flat

end of a soldering aid into the side
slot on the trim ring. Press in, then
lift up to hook it underneath, then
pry up.

Figure 6-- 3: Trim removal

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 6-- 13

Removal and Installation Procedures

Bottom Cover 1. Remove the bottom cover: See Figure 6--4, on page 6--14.
2. Orient the oscilloscope: Set the oscilloscope so its top is down on the work
surface and its bottom is facing you.
a. Remove the four T-15 Torx screws that secure the bottom cover to the
oscilloscope.
b. Remove the bottom cover from the oscilloscope.
3. Reinstallation: Do in reverse steps a and b to reinstall the bottom cover.

Bottom cover

T-15 Torx
screw (4)

Figure 6-- 4: Bottom cover removal

6-- 14 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Removal and Installation Procedures

Covers 1. Remove the left and right covers: See Figures 6--5 and 6--6, on pages 6--16
and 6--17.
H Trim (all)
H Bottom cover
2. Orient the oscilloscope: Set the oscilloscope so its rear is on the work surface
and the front of the oscilloscope facing you.

NOTE. All mounting screw holes are indicated by a star etched around the
mounting hole.

a. Remove the eleven T-15 Torx screws that secure the covers to the top
and both sides of the chassis.
b. Remove the seven T-15 Torx screws that secure the covers to the bottom
of the chassis.
c. Pull the bottom-right cover down and slide to the right to remove from
the oscilloscope. Pull the top-left cover upward and slide to the left to
remove from the oscilloscope.

CAUTION. Take care not to bind or snag the covers on the oscilloscope internal
cabling as you remove or install.

3. Reinstallation: Do in reverse steps a through c to reinstall the cabinet covers.

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 6-- 15

Removal and Installation Procedures

All left and right cover

mounting holes are
indicated as shown.

Left side cover

T-15 Torx
screw (11)

Right side cover

Figure 6-- 5: Cover removal

6-- 16 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Removal and Installation Procedures

Left side cover

Right side cover

T-15 Torx
screw (7)

Figure 6-- 6: Cover removal

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 6-- 17

Removal and Installation Procedures

Pouch

Left side trim Top cover trim

Left side cover

Rear foot

Right side cover

Front panel trim

Right side trim

Carrying handle

Chassis
Front panel cover Acquisition trim Bottom cover

Figure 6-- 7: External modules

6-- 18 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Removal and Installation Procedures

Hard drive

CD drive
CD drive
Interface board

Microprocessor,
fan and heat sink

Fan assembly

NLX board

Riser board
THan
Power PC
Floppy disk drive (PPC) board
Low-voltage power
Display adapter board supply assembly

Acquisition board

Front panel
board
PA bus
Front panel Rear board
keypad distribution
Front board
Front panel
assembly distribution
Power flex circuit board
Display module
assembly

Figure 6-- 8: Internal modules

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 6-- 19

Removal and Installation Procedures

Procedures for Outer-Chassis Modules

You should have completed the Procedures for External Modules before doing
many of the procedures in this collection. The procedures found here are listed in
disassembly order:
H Front Panel Assembly
H Front Panel Board
H Front Panel Keypad
H Display Assembly
H Display Adapter Board
H On/Standby Switch Flex Circuit
H Floppy Disk Drive
H Hard Disk Drive
H CD Drive
H Fan Assembly
H Front and Rear Power Distribution Boards (PA Bus Board)
H Low-Voltage Power Supply
H NLX Battery
H NLX Board
H Microprocessor
H PPC Battery
H Power PC Board
H Acquisition Board

Front Panel Assembly 1. Locate module to be removed: Locate the Front-panel assembly in
Figure 6--9, on page 6--21. Additional modules to be removed:
H Trim (Front panel)
2. Remove the Front-Panel assembly: See Figure 6--9, on page 6--21.
3. Orient the oscilloscope: Set the oscilloscope so its bottom is down on the
work surface and its front panel is facing you.

6-- 20 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Removal and Installation Procedures

a. Remove the six T-15 Torx screws that secure the Front-panel assembly to
the front chassis.
b. Grasp the top of Front Panel assembly and pull forward to allow access
to the ribbon-cable connector on the front-panel board.
c. Use the 1@8 inch flat-bladed screwdriver to carefully lift the J1 cable
connector lock up to disconnect J1 flex cable from the display module
assembly. See Figure 6--10, on page 6--22. Note the connector’s pin 1
index mark and the black stripe on the cable for later reassembly.
d. Pull the Front-Panel assembly forward and remove from the
oscilloscope.
4. Reinstallation: Do in reverse steps a through d to reinstall the front-panel
assembly.

Floppy disk
support tab (2)

Chassis
slot (2)

J1 ribbon cable

Front panel
assembly
Front panel square
opening (2)

T--15 Torx
screw (6)

Figure 6-- 9: Front-panel assembly removal

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 6-- 21

Removal and Installation Procedures

Black stripe
toward connector

Screwdriver

Figure 6-- 10: J1 flex cable connector removal

Front Panel Board 1. Locate module to be removed: Locate the Front Panel assembly Figure 6--9,
on page 6--21. Additional modules to be Removed:
H Front Panel Knobs
H Trim (front panel)
H Front Panel Assembly
2. Remove the Front Panel board: See Figure 6--11, on page 6--23.
a. Remove the eight T-15 Torx screws that secure the Front panel board to
the Front panel assembly.
b. Pry the board up off the alignment studs. Place a flat bladed screwdriver
in the pry point access holes to pry the board up from the assembly.
c. Remove the board from the assembly.
3. Reinstallation: Do in reverse steps a through c to reinstall the front panel
board.

6-- 22 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Removal and Installation Procedures

Front Panel Keypad 1. Locate module to be removed: Locate the Front Panel assembly in
Figure 6--9, on page 6--21. Additional modules to be removed:
H Front Panel Knobs
H Trim (front panel)
H Front Panel Assembly
H Front Panel Board
2. Remove the Front Panel keypad: See Figure 6--11.
a. Pull on each of the keypad support guides to separate the keypad from
the front panel board. Use a pair of tweezers or equivalent tool to pull the
twelve keypad support guides.
b. Remove the keypad from the front panel board.

Front panel board T-15 Torx screw (8)

Keypad support
guide (12)
Keypad

Alignment
stud Pry point
access hole

Pry point access hole

Figure 6-- 11: Front panel board and keyboard removal

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 6-- 23

Removal and Installation Procedures

CAUTION. When removing or installing the keypad, make sure you do not touch
the switch contacts with your fingers. The oils in your fingers will degrade or
damage the switch contacts. To help prevent damage to the keypad use cotton
gloves when removing or installing the keyboard pad.

3. Reinstallation: Do in reverse step 2 to reinstall the keypad, front panel board,

and the front panel assembly. Then see the following instructions:
a. Make sure the keypad is aligned properly on the Front Panel board.
b. Make sure the ribbon cable is routed correctly when installing the Front
Panel into the chassis.
c. Insert the two floppy disk support tabs into the front panel square
openings. Both left front panel tabs must go into the chassis slots. See
Figure 6--9, on page 6--21.

Display Assembly 1. Locate module to be removed: Locate the Display assembly, Figure 6--12, on
page 6--25. Additional modules to be Removed:
H Trim (front panel & top)
2. Orient the oscilloscope: Set the oscilloscope so its bottom is down on the
work surface and its front panel is facing you.

CAUTION. To avoid damage to the front panel Standby/On switch assembly, do

not set the Display module assembly on a work surface. Sliding the oscilloscope
over the edge of the work surface could break off the On/Standby switch
assembly.

3. Remove the Display assembly: See Figure 6--12, on page 6--25.

a. Remove the four T-15 Torx screws that secure the display assembly to
the chassis.
b. Grasp the display assembly at the finger reliefs located at the top-right
and bottom-left corners of the display assembly and pull forward far
enough to allow access to the flex cable connector.
c. Disconnect J5 flex cable from the display assembly. Remove the display
module assembly from the oscilloscope. See Figure 6--12, on page 6--25.

6-- 24 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Removal and Installation Procedures

T-15 Torx
screw (4) Finger relief

J5 Flex cable

Finger relief

Display
assembly

Figure 6-- 12: Display removal

4. Remove the Touch panel from the Display assembly: See figures 6--13 and
6--14, on pages 6--26 and 6--27.

CAUTION. To prevent degradation of the display sharpness, this procedure must

be performed in a dust free environment. The service technician should wear
cotton gloves to prevent finger oils from contaminating any surfaces of the
display glass.

a. Disconnect cables J1 and J7 from the Display Adapter circuit board.

b. Separate the assembly by carefully prying the Touch panel (outer)
assembly from the Display (inner) assembly. Insert a flat-bladed
screwdriver in the access notches to push out on the Touch panel
assembly.

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 6-- 25

Removal and Installation Procedures

Access notches
(top and bottom)

Touch panel LCD module

Figure 6-- 13: Touch panel and LCD assembly removal

5. Reinstallation: Do in reverse steps 1 through 5 to reinstall the Display

assembly.
Display Adapter Board 1. Locate module to be removed: Locate the display adapter board in the locator
diagram Internal Modules, Figure 6--8, on page 6--19. Additional modules to
be Removed:
H Trim (front panel & top)
H Display assembly
2. Remove the Display Adapter Board: See Figure 6--14, on pages 6--27.
a. Disconnect cables J1, J4, J6, J5, and J7 and cable clip (see Figure 6--15
on page 6--27) from the Display Adapter board.
b. Remove the three T-15 Torx screws that secure the Display Adapter
circuit board to the Display assembly. Remove the Display Adapter from
the assembly.
3. Reinstallation: Do in reverse steps a and b to reinstall the board.

6-- 26 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Removal and Installation Procedures

Display module

Inverter board
J6

J4

J1

J7
Display J5
adaptor board
T--15 Torx
Back view screw (3)

Figure 6-- 14: Display adaptor board removal

Slide the clip J11

over connector

J10 Clip to secure

connector as shown

Figure 6-- 15: Cable clip removal

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 6-- 27

Removal and Installation Procedures

On/Standby Switch Power 1. Locate module to be removed: Locate the On/Standby Switch power flex
Flex Circuit Removal circuit in the locator diagram Internal Modules, Figure 6--8, on page 6--19.
Additional modules to be Removed:
H Trim (front panel)
H Display assembly
2. Orient the assembly: Set the display adapter so its back is down on the work
surface and its front is facing you.
3. Remove the On/Standby Switch power flex circuit: See Figure 6--16, on
page 6--29.
a. Peel the On/Standby switch power flex circuit away from the front of the
display assembly.
b. Disconnect the flex circuit from J7 on the Display Adapter circuit board.
c. Grasp the flex circuit and pull it out of the Display assembly.
4. Reinstallation: Do following procedure to reinstall the On/Standby Switch.
a. Remove the protective backing on the power flex circuit.
b. Slide the connector end of the power flex circuit through the slot in the
Display assembly. Make sure the flex circuit connector aligns with J7 on
the Display Adapter circuit board.
c. Align the holes in the power flex circuit to the two index posts on the
front side of the Display assembly.
d. Firmly press the flex circuit to the Display assembly chassis surface.

6-- 28 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Removal and Installation Procedures

Display
assembly

Power flex circuit

Front view

Display adaptor board

Power flex circuit

J7

Back view

Figure 6-- 16: Power flex circuit removal

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 6-- 29

Removal and Installation Procedures

Floppy Disk Drive 1. Locate modules to be removed: Locate the Floppy Disk Drive in the locator
diagram Internal Modules, Figure 6--8, on page 6--19. Additional modules to
be Removed:
H Trim (front panel and top)
H Front Panel assembly
H Display assembly
2. Remove the floppy disk drive: Use Figure 6--17 as a guide. A #0 Phillips
screwdriver is required for this procedure.
3. Orient the oscilloscope: Set the oscilloscope so its bottom is down on the
work surface and its front panel is facing you.
a. Remove the two small phillips screws that secure the floppy disk drive
assembly to the bracket. Use the access hole located on the outer chassis
to remove one of the small phillips screws.
b. Slide the floppy drive out toward the front of the oscilloscope far enough
to allow you to disconnect the ribbon cable connector.
c. Remove the floppy drive from the oscilloscope.
4. Reinstallation: Do in reverse steps a through c to reinstall the floppy disk
drive.

Ribbon
cable
Access
hole (2)

Floppy
drive

Small Phillips
screw (2)

Figure 6-- 17: Floppy disk drive removal

6-- 30 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Removal and Installation Procedures

Hard Disk Drive 1. Locate module to be removed: Locate the Hard Disk Drive in the locator
diagram Internal Modules, Figure 6--8, on page 6--19.

CAUTION. Do not remove the replaceable hard disk drive when the oscilloscope
is powered on.
The replaceable hard disk drive may be permanently damaged if it is removed
while the oscilloscope is powered on.
Always power down the oscilloscope before removing the replaceable hard disk
drive.

2. Orient the oscilloscope: Set the oscilloscope so its bottom is down on the
work surface and its rear panel is facing you.
3. Remove the hard disk drive: See Figure 6--18, on page 6--32.
a. Verify that the oscilloscope is powered off.
b. Push the hard disk drive cover in and the hard drive will disconnect from
the latch.
c. Grasp the hard disk drive assembly and slide it out of the oscilloscope.
4. Reinstallation: Do in reverse step 3 to reinstall the hard disk drive assembly.
The hard disk drive will push in to lock and push in again to unlock.

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 6-- 31

Removal and Installation Procedures

Depress
the latch

Remove the
hard disk drive

Figure 6-- 18: Hard disk drive removal

5. Remove the hard disk drive from the cartridge: See Figure 6--19, on
page 6--32.
a. Remove the four #0 Phillips screws that fasten the hard disk drive to the
cartridge.
b. Carefully remove the hard disk drive from the cartridge, and remove the
cable assembly from the connector on the hard disk drive.

Remove 4 screws

Figure 6-- 19: Removing the hard disk drive from the cartridge

6-- 32 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Removal and Installation Procedures

CD Drive 1. Locate module to be removed: Locate the CD Drive in the locator diagram
Internal Modules, Figure 6--8, on page 6--19. Additional modules to be
Removed:
H Trim (all)
H Bottom cover
H Left and Right covers
2. Remove the CD Drive assembly: See Figure 6--20, on page 6--34.
3. Orient the oscilloscope: Set the oscilloscope so its bottom is down on the
work surface and its rear panel is facing you.
a. Remove the two T-15 Torx screws that secure the CD Drive assembly to
the rear chassis.
b. Disconnect the CD Drive ribbon cable J230, from Riser board.
c. Slide the CD Drive assembly (with the ribbon cable attached) toward the
rear of the chassis and remove it from the oscilloscope.
4. Remove the CD Drive bracket and Rom interface board: See Figure 6--20, on
page 6--34.
a. Remove the four #0 Phillips screws that secure the bracket to the CD
Drive. Remove the CD Drive from the bracket.
b. Remove the Interface board from the CD Drive by pulling the Interface
board straight back until they separate.
5. Reinstallation: Do in reverse steps 3 and 4 to reinstall the CD Drive
assembly.

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 6-- 33

Removal and Installation Procedures

CD drive
interface board

CD drive

CD drive
ribbon cable
#0 Phillips
Disconnect screw (4)
J230 CD drive
ribbon cable CD drive bracket

T--15 Torxdrive
screw (2)

Figure 6-- 20: CD drive and bracket removal

Fan Assembly Removal 1. Locate module to be removed: Locate the Fan assembly in the locator
diagram Internal Modules, Figure 6--8, on page 6--19. Additional modules to
be Removed:
H Trim (all)
H Bottom cover
H Left and Right covers
2. Orient the oscilloscope: Set the oscilloscope so its bottom is down on the
work surface and its left side is facing you.
3. Remove the fan: See Figure 6--21, on page 6--35.

6-- 34 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Removal and Installation Procedures

a. Disconnect the fan from processor/display board: Disconnect the two fan
power cables J130 and J170 located on the processor board.
b. Remove the two T-15 Torx screws securing the fan assembly to the top
main chassis.
c. Lift the fan assembly up and out from the chassis.
4. Reinstallation: Do in reverse steps a through c to reinstall the fan assembly.

CAUTION. Take care when handling the fan assembly, the fan blades are brittle
and can be easily damaged.

Disconnect
from J130

Disconnect
from J170

Figure 6-- 21: Fan assembly removal

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 6-- 35

Removal and Installation Procedures

Front and Rear Power 1. Assemble equipment and locate modules to be removed: Find the modules to
Distribution Circuit be removed in the locator diagram Internal Modules, Figure 6--8, on
Boards page 6--19. Additional modules to be Removed:
H Trim (all)
H Bottom cover
H Left and Right covers
2. Orient the oscilloscope: Set the oscilloscope so its left side is down on the
work surface and its right side is facing you.
3. Remove the Front Power Distribution board: See Figure 6--22, on page 6--37.
a. Grasp the Front Power Distribution board and pull it out from the
oscilloscope to disconnect it from the following connectors: J2 Power
supply board and J102 Acquisition board.
b. Remove the Rear Power Distribution board: Grasp the Rear Power
Distribution board and pull it out from the oscilloscope to disconnect it
from the following connectors: J201 Processor board, J1 Power supply
board, and J102 Acquisition board.
c. Remove the PA Bus Interconnect board: Grasp the PA Bus Interconnect
board and pull it out form the oscilloscope to disconnect it form the
following connectors: J930 Processor board and J100 Acquisition board.
4. Reinstallation: Do in reverse step 3 to reinstall the front and rear power
distribution and the PA bus interconnect boards.

6-- 36 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Removal and Installation Procedures

PA bus
circuit board

Front power
distribution
circuit board Rear power
distribution
circuit board

Figure 6-- 22: Front and rear power distribution and PA bus boards removal

Low-Voltage Power 1. Assemble equipment and locate modules to be removed: Locate the modules
Supply to be removed in the locator diagram Internal Modules, Figure 6--8,
on page 6--19. Additional modules to be Removed:
H Trim (all)
H Bottom cover
H Left and Right covers
H Front and Rear Distribution Boards and the PA bus interconnect board
2. Orient the oscilloscope: Set the oscilloscope so its bottom is down on the
work surface and its right-side is facing you.
3. Remove the low-voltage power supply: See Figure 6--23, on page 6--38.
a. Remove the two T-15 Torx screws securing the low-voltage power
supply to the right-side chassis support.
b. Remove the three T-15 Torx screws securing the low-voltage power
supply to rear chassis.

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 6-- 37

Removal and Installation Procedures

c. Grasp the low-voltage power supply and carefully slide the assembly out
of the oscilloscope.
4. Reinstallation: Do in reverse steps a through c to reinstall the low-voltage
power supply.

T--15 Torx
screw (3)

Low--voltage
power supply

T--15 Torx
screw (2)

Figure 6-- 23: Low-voltage power supply removal

6-- 38 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Removal and Installation Procedures

NLX Battery 1. Locate module to be removed: Locate the NLX battery in the locator diagram
Internal Modules, Figure 6--8, on page 6--19. Additional modules to be
removed:
H Trim (all)
H Bottom cover
H Left and Right covers
2. Remove the NLX battery: See Figure 6--24, page 6--39.

CAUTION. Only perform these steps if you need to replace the NLX battery.
Removal of this battery will cause the loss of some BIOS settings.

a. Lift the edge of the battery opposite the hold-down spring and slide the
battery out of its holder (see Figure 6--24).

NLX battery
Hold--down spring NLX battery

Battery edge
access notch
NLX board

NLX battery

Figure 6-- 24: NLX battery removal

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 6-- 39

Removal and Installation Procedures

3. Reinstallation: If your instrument uses Windows 98, reinstall the NLX

battery as follows:
a. Do in reverse step 2a to reinstall the NLX battery.
b. Power on the oscilloscope.
c. After the oscilloscope displays Press <F1> to resume, power off the
instrument and then power it on again.
d. From the Windows operating system select Start, Programs, and then
MS-DOS Prompt.
H If you want your oscilloscope to have access to a network, enter the
following command:
CD ..\TEKTRONIX\CMOS
CMOS --R NET
H If you want your oscilloscope to not have access to a network, but be
able to boot faster, enter the following command:
CD ..\TEKTRONIX\CMOS
CMOS --R NONET
e. Power off your oscilloscope, and then power on your oscilloscope.
4. Reinstallation: If your instrument uses Windows 2000, reinstall the NLX
battery as follows:
a. Do in reverse step 2a to reinstall the NLX battery.

NOTE. Follow the instructions in the Instruction.doc file on the floppy disk.
Viewing this file requires Windows tools. The instrument can not view the file
while booting from the floppy disk.

b. Install the BIOS Update and LAN Enable floppy disk that came with
your Windows 2000 Operating System Restore CD.
c. Remove the hard drive from the instrument.
d. Power on the oscilloscope.
e. If the software suggests that you update your BIOS, let the software
update the BIOS.
f. To install the correct CMOS settings, select either Enable Networking or
Disable Networking. The instrument will boot faster with networking
disabled.

6-- 40 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Removal and Installation Procedures

g. After the software updates your instrument settings, remove the floppy
disk.
h. Power off your oscilloscope.
i. Reinstall the hard drive.
j. Power on your oscilloscope.
NLX Board 1. Locate module to be removed: Locate the NLX Board in the locator diagram
Internal Modules, Figure 6--8, on page 6--19. Additional modules to be
removed:
H Trim (all)
H Bottom cover
H Left and Right covers
2. Remove the NLX Board assembly: See Figure 6--25, on page 6--42.
3. Orient the oscilloscope: Set the oscilloscope so its bottom is down on the
work surface and its top panel is facing you.
a. Remove the two T-15 Torx screws that secure the floppy disk drive
assembly into the front chassis.
b. Slide the floppy drive assembly, with cable attached, out toward the rear
of the oscilloscope. Place floppy drive assembly on top of the hard/CD
drive bracket.
c. Remove the five T-15 Torx screws that secure NLX board assembly to
the chassis.
d. Remove the five T-15 Torx screws that secure NLX board assembly to
the rear chassis.
e. Remove the shield between the hard disk drive and the CD drive.
f. Grasp the front edge of the NLX board assembly and pull up on the
assembly to disconnect the Riser Adapter from the Processor board edge
connector.
g. Remove the NLX board assembly from the oscilloscope.

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 6-- 41

Removal and Installation Procedures

Hard/CD drive
bracket

Place floppy drive assembly on

top of hard/CD drive bracket

NLX board
assembly

Riser adapter
board

Leave floppy drive

cable attached Shield

Remove floppy
drive assembly
from front chassis

Processor board
edge connector

Figure 6-- 25: NLX assembly removal

4. Remove the Riser Adapter and NLX Boards: See Figure 6--26, on page 6--44.
a. Remove the two T-15 Torx screws that secure Riser Adapter board to the
NLX support bracket.
b. Disconnect the ribbon cable connectors from the floppy drive, hard drive
and CD drive.
c. Remove the floppy drive assembly from the NLX board assembly.

6-- 42 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Removal and Installation Procedures

d. Grasp the Riser board and pull it straight out to disconnect J510 edge
card connector from the NLX board. Remove the Riser Adapter board
from the NLX board assembly.
e. Remove the four T-15 Torx screws that secure NLX board to the NLX
support bracket.
f. Remove the six 3/16 nut posts that secure the three connectors to the rear
of the support bracket. Then remove the NLX board from the support
bracket.
g. Remove the NLX board from the support bracket.
5. Reinstallation: Do in reverse steps 3 and 4 to reinstall the NLX board.

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 6-- 43

Removal and Installation Procedures

T--15 Torx
screw (4)

Floppy
drive Hard drive
cable cable NLX board
connector

Riser
adapter
board

T--15 Torx
screw (2)

CD drive
cable
connector J510

Nut post (6)

NLX support
bracket

Figure 6-- 26: Riser adapter and NLX board removal

6-- 44 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Removal and Installation Procedures

Microprocessor 1. Locate module to be removed: Locate the microprocessor board in the locator
diagram Internal Modules, Figure 6--8, on page 6--19. Additional modules to
be removed:
H Trim
H Bottom cover
H Left and Right covers

CAUTION. The microprocessor is susceptible to static-discharge damage. Service

this component only in a static-free environment. Observe standard handling
precautions for static-sensitive devices while servicing the oscilloscope. Always
wear grounded wrist and foot straps while servicing the microprocessor, NLX or
processor boards.

2. Remove the microprocessor: See Figure 6--27, on page 6--46.

a. Disconnect the fan power cable J401 from the NLX board.
b. Push down and pull out on the holding bracket located nearest to the
outer edge of the circuit board.
c. Pull out and unlatch the remaining bracket.
d. Lift the microprocessor socket locking lever upward. Remove the
microprocessor.
3. Reinstallation: Reinstall the microprocessor to the NLX board as follows:
a. Install the microprocessor in the socket.
b. Lower the socket locking lever.
c. Make sure the fan/heatsink assembly is positioned with the fan cable
toward the outer edge of the circuit board.
d. Place the fan/heatsink assembly on the microprocessor to allow you to
latch the bracket to the tab that is nearest to the center of the circuit
board.
e. Set the remaining edge of the fan/heatsink down on the microprocessor
and fasten the remaining bracket to the assembly.
f. Connect the fan power cable J401 to the NLX board.

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 6-- 45

Removal and Installation Procedures

Fan and heatsink

Microprocessor

Locking lever

Push down
and pull out to
release clamp
Push down
and pull out to J401 power cable
release clamp

NLX board

Figure 6-- 27: Microprocessor removal

PPC Battery 1. This battery must be replaced by a Tektronix Service Center

6-- 46 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Removal and Installation Procedures

PPC Processor Board 1. Locate module to be removed: Replacement of this board must be performed
by a Tektronix Service Center. Locate the PPC (Power PC) processor board
assembly in the locator diagram Internal Modules, Figure 6--8, on page 6--19.
Additional modules to be removed:
H Trim (all)
H Bottom cover
H Left and Right covers
H Hard Disk and CD Drive
H Floppy Disk Drive
H NLX Board
H Front, Rear Power Distribution and PA Bus Boards
2. Orient the oscilloscope: Set the oscilloscope so its bottom is down on the
work surface and its top panel is facing you.
3. Remove the PPC processor board assembly: See Figure 6--28, on page 6--48.
a. Disconnect the J190 and J690 ribbon cables and cables J130 and J150
from the PPC processor board.
b. Remove the nine T-15 Torx screws securing the PPC processor to the
chassis support.
c. Remove the five T-15 Torx screws securing the PPC processor board
assembly to the rear chassis.
d. Remove the board and bracket.
4. Remove the PPC processor board bracket: See Figure 6--28, on page 6--48.
a. Remove the two 3/16 nut posts that secure the RS-232 connector to the
rear of the support bracket.
b. Remove the two 5/16 nut posts that secure the sub-D connector to the rear
of the support bracket.
c. Remove the two Phillips screws that secure the PCMCIA (Personal card,
memory card interface adapter) to the PPC processor board. Remove the
PCMCIA and bracket from the PPC processor board.
5. Reinstallation: Do in reverse steps 3 and 4 to reinstall the PPC processor
board assembly.

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 6-- 47

Removal and Installation Procedures

J190

J691 J690

T--15 Torx
screw (9)
Phillips
screw (2)

PPC Processor
board
Support
bracket

3/16 Nut
post (2)
5/16 Nut
post (2)

Chassis
support

Figure 6-- 28: PPC Processor board removal

6-- 48 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Removal and Installation Procedures

Acquisition Board 1. Locate module to be removed: Locate the Acquisition board in the locator
diagram, Figure 6--8, on page 6--19. Additional modules to be removed:
H Trim
H Bottom cover
H Left and Right covers
H Front and Rear Power Distribution boards (PA Bus board)
2. Orient the oscilloscope: Set the oscilloscope so its top is down on the work
surface and its bottom is facing you.
3. Remove the Acquisition board: See Figure 6--29, on page 6--50.
a. Disconnect EXT REF and REF OUT coaxial cables from the rear panel
BNC connectors.
b. Remove the six T-15 Torx screws securing the Acquisition assembly to
the front chassis.
c. Remove the six T-15 Torx screws securing the Acquisition assembly to
the chassis.
d. Slide the Acquisition board toward the rear of the oscilloscope. Then lift
the board out of the oscilloscope.

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 6-- 49

Removal and Installation Procedures

T--15 Torx
screw (6)

Acquisition
circuit board

Gasket

Coaxial
Flex circuit
cables (2)

1.1

T--15 Torx
screw (6)

Figure 6-- 29: Acquisition circuit board removal

6-- 50 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

Troubleshooting

WARNING. Before performing this or any other procedure in this manual, read
the General Safety Summary and Service Safety Summary found at the
beginning of this manual.
To prevent possible injury to service personnel or damage to electrical compo-
nents, please read Preventing ESD on page 6-- 1.

This section contains information and procedures designed to help you isolate
faults to a module.
This section assumes that service personnel have the prerequisite skills required
to work on this oscilloscope, including PC troubleshooting and Windows 98
skills. Details of PC and Windows 98 operation and service are not in this
manual.
For assistance, contact your local Tektronix Service Center.

Service Level
This subsection contains information and procedures designed to help you isolate
faulty modules in the oscilloscope. If a module needs to be replaced, follow the
Removal and Installation Procedures located in this section.

Check for Common Problems

Use Table 6--4 to quickly isolate possible failures. The table lists problems and
possible causes. The list is not exhaustive, but it may help you eliminate a
problem that is quick to fix, such as a blown fuse or loose cable.

Table 6-- 4: Failure symptoms and possible causes

Symptom Possible cause(s)

Oscilloscope will not power on H Power cord not plugged in
H Failed fuse
H Mains power switch is in off position
H Faulty power supply
Front panel light comes on H Faulty fan cable
(oscilloscope powers on), but H Defective fan assembly
one or more fans will not
operate H Faulty power supply

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 6-- 51

Troubleshooting

Table 6-- 4: Failure symptoms and possible causes (Cont.)

Symptom Possible cause(s)

PPC appears “dead”; power H SO DIMMs incorrectly installed or missing. Missing DIMMs
light comes on, but monitor will cause a POST fault and NLX will beep
screen(s) is (are) blank, H Defective Power PC (PPC) board
oscilloscope emits no beeps
H Hold down on-standby button on the PPC, if system boots,
replace the power supply
Hard disk drive related H Defective hard disk drive
symptoms H Incorrect hard disk type selected in the BIOS setup
H Replaceable hard disk drive not installed
H Power supply failure
H Corrupted BIOS module firmware, reinstall firmware
H Hard disk drive not configured as bootable (slave) master
hard disk drive
H Loose cable
H Faulty riser board
H Faulty PPC board
CD-ROM related symptoms H Defective CD-ROM
H Defective CD-ROM drive cable
H Defective CD-ROM board
H Incorrect CD-ROM configuration in the BIOS setup
Flat panel display blank H Display selection jumper set incorrectly on front panel board
(there are no jumpers on the board when the oscilloscope is
shipped from the factory; this is the correct default setting)
H Video adapter set to AGP (connect monitor to NLX VGA
port, enter BIOS, set Video Adapter = PCI)
H BIOS setting not Advance > Video Configuration > Primary
Video Adapter = PCI
H Defective cable from front panel board to display adapter
board
H Defective cable from inverter board to display adapter board
H Defective cable from inverter board to backlighting display
lamp
H Defective backlighting display lamp
H Faulty display
H Faulty controller board
H Faulty inverter board
H Faulty display adapter board
BIOS error messages H Refer to the BIOS error message table on page 6--63

6-- 52 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Troubleshooting

Equipment Required
You will need a digital voltmeter to check power supply voltages, as described on
page 6--56.
Testing might also be required to correct some faults. Under those circumstances,
you will need the test equipment listed in the Performance Verification and
Adjustment Procedures in this manual.

Fault Isolation Procedure

Follow the primary troubleshooting tree in Figure 6--30 for fault isolation. This
tree calls for you to run the diagnostics programs, and check for BIOS errors.

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 6-- 53

Troubleshooting

1 See If the Oscilloscope

Start Will Not Boot on
Windows No page 6--57.
boots? 2 See Booting Into
Windows on page 6--57.
Turn on power 3 Boot to Safe Mode and
Possible cause:
Yes restore the registry.
1 Oscilloscope power
cord is not plugged in 4 Consult the
Run CheckIt (see troubleshooting section
2 Failed fuse of your Microsoft
CheckIt Utilities on
Oscilloscope No 3 Mains power switch page 6--61) Windows manual
powers on 4 Do Isolating to a Board 5 See Troubleshooting
(fans run)? If Power Will Not Come Using Reset Circuits on
Up on page 6--55 page 6--71.
Yes
Passes all No
Possible cause: tests? Note: It is normal for
1 SO DIMMs incorrectly CheckIt to report an audio
installed or missing failure.
Oscilloscope appears Yes Yes Repair/replace failed part
“dead” (dead screen, Beeps 2 Defective controller identified by CheckIt
board Yes
no beeps)?
No 3 Check beep codes on
page 6--67
Run oscilloscope diagnostics (see
page 6--62 for instructions)
No

Passes all No Acquisition board

tests? defective
Flat-panel No Install VGA No
display OK? VGA OK.
monitor

Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes If the oscilloscope Application is not
Move monitor already running, start it from the
VGA OK. to SVGA port. Start menu.

No

Bad PPC, DA, or inverter BIOS setting, bad

board. Loose connections PPC or riser board
Oscilloscope No Reinstall oscilloscope
Application software (see user
starts? manual)
Bad NLX, PPC, or riser board Do If the Oscilloscope
Application Does Not
Yes Work on page 6--58
External Possible cause:
monitor Yes
1 Monitor cable defective or not Done
blank, if connected to oscilloscope
present?
2 External monitor controls
turned down
No
3 Defective monitor

BIOS error Yes See BIOS error

message? code, Table 6--8
on page 6--63

No

Figure 6-- 30: Primary troubleshooting tree

6-- 54 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Troubleshooting

Isolating to a Board if If the mains power switch is on and the oscilloscope is not on, (power supply is
Power Will Not Come Up in standby mode), a red light (see Figure 6--31 for its location) is visible through
the right side of the oscilloscope. If the oscilloscope is on, the red light is off.

Mains power-on and over current LEDs are

near the center of the power supply. A red
glow from them is visible while looking
through the side of Oscilloscope

Figure 6-- 31: Location of power-on and over current LEDs

If the oscilloscope thinks power is on, a red light (see Figure 6--31) means that
there is an over current condition.
If the on/standby pin (pin C1 of P201 on the rear power distribution board or pin
B162 on the riser board) is low, the oscilloscope thinks power is on.
Remove boards one at a time to locate a fault (the display, floppy, acquisition
board, front [analog supply to acquisition board] and power distribution board,
the NLX board, and the riser board). If you remove the NLX board, you must
jumper the debug power-on pins (see Figure 6--32). The PPC board and the rear
power distribution board are required for power to come up.
If removing the boards did not find the problem, replace the power supply.

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 6-- 55

Troubleshooting

Debug
RST

Debug
Power-On
Debug VSB5

Figure 6-- 32: Location of debug pins

Checking the Power To check the power supply voltages, power on the oscilloscope and connect the
Supply Voltages reference lead of a digital voltmeter to chassis ground, such as the top of the
power supply.
Attach a 0.025 inch square pin to the probe tip of the other lead and insert it into
a pin on one of the connectors. The pins that should be carrying voltages are
listed in Table 6--5. The location of the J1 and J2 connectors is shown in
Figure 6--33 on page 6--57.
Measure the power supply voltages with the voltmeter and compare each reading
to the values listed in the tables. If the voltages are within about 5% of the
nominal voltages, your power supply is functional.

Table 6-- 5: Power supply voltages

Front power distribution board Rear power distribution board

(P2) and Power supply (J2) Voltage (P1) and Power supply (J1) Voltage Riser board Voltage
Pins A/B/C1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 +3.3 V Pins A/B/C5, 6 +12 V Pin B170 --5 V
Pins A/B/C13 --15 V Pins A/B/C8, 9, 11, 12, 14, 15, 17 +5 V Pin A1 --12 V
Pins A/B/C15 +15 V Pins A/B/C19, 21, 23, 25, 27, 29, 31 +3.3 V Pin B2 +12 V
Pins A/B/C17, 18, 20, 21, 22 --5 V Pins B/C3 (fan voltage) +9.8 V Pin A5 +3.3 V
Pins A/B/C24, 25, 27, 28, 30, 31 +5 V Pin A57 +5 V

6-- 56 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Troubleshooting

J1 and P1

PA bus
circuit board
J2 and P2 Rear power
distribution
Front power circuit board
distribution
circuit board

Figure 6-- 33: Connectors J1 and J2

If the Oscilloscope Will If there is a display on the VGA port, but not on the LCD, replace the display
Not Boot assembly (LCD, lamps, and cable).
If the display adapter is bad, the BIOS should report it using beep codes (see
Table 6--10, on page 6--67).
If nothing is displayed, is the display turned on? At boot time and while using an
external monitor connected to the NLX external video port, press F2 to enter the
BIOS setup. The Advanced Video Configuration menu lets you select PCI (LCD)
or AGP (the NLX port on the rear panel). The lower VGA port on the rear panel
is the PCI video port (driven by the same video controller as the LCD).

Booting Into Windows If the oscilloscope will not boot, run the CMOS restore utility (see Update/Re-
store the NLX Board CMOS on page 6--73).
If booting starts, finds the hard disk, but hangs displaying the Windows splash
screen:
1. Select the AGP video port using the setup menu.

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 6-- 57

Troubleshooting

2. Disable the busses and disconnect the PPC board by installing J840 and J841.
3. If the system boots (It will only boot to Windows, the oscilloscope applica-
tion will not run) to the external NLX video port, replace the PPC board.

If the Oscilloscope If the oscilloscope boots into Windows, but the oscilloscope application does not
Application Does Not work (the DPO Man graphic is displayed), check the following:
Work
1. The application software.
2. The Acquisition board.
3. The PPC board.
4. The Riser board (try removing and reinstalling the Riser board).
5. Did someone exit the application using the Task Manager and then try to
reenter the application without rebooting?
6. Set Diagnostic Selection DIP switch 2 to off (see Dip Switch Controls on
page 6--68 for more information), reboot; check the Diagnostic LED (see
page 6--69 for more information).
7. If the relays click, the acquisition is running.
8. Check the desktop properties (right click on the desktop and select Proper-
ties). On the Settings tab, 16 bit is required. Video merge will not work with
other settings. If you change the setting, reboot.
9. On the Settings tab of the desktop properties, select Advanced and then the
Performance tab. Hardware Acceleration must be set to Full for video merge
to work. If you change the setting, reboot.

PPC and NLX PC Diagnostics

The primary diagnostics for the oscilloscope are the power-on diagnostics, the
QA+Win32 diagnostics, and the oscilloscope diagnostics. Procedures for running
these diagnostics are described below.

Power-On Diagnostics The power-on diagnostics check the basic functionality of the oscilloscope at
every power on. If any failures occur at power on, the screen displays the
calibration and diagnostics property page. Table 6--6 lists a subset of the power
on tests. Use the results of the tests to help you isolate problems to system
modules.

6-- 58 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Troubleshooting

The power on tests ensure that hardware is installed and can be accessed by the
software. The tests provide limited diagnostic information, but do not provide
any performance information. The oscilloscope diagnostics provide more
extensive tests than the power-on diagnostics.
The power on tests check the generic hardware including the keyboard, mouse,
memory, CPU, and associated peripherals. The interrupt lines and trigger lines
are also checked.
If there are no failures, you can view the results of the tests in the Instrument
Diagnostics page under the Utilities menu.

Table 6-- 6: Power-on diagnostic tests

Component Group & test Error codes Power on Extended

Mainframe VTC Reset Test n
VTC Walk1 Test n
ADG Register Test n
ADG VXI Addr Test n
ADG VXI Data Test n
System
y Interrupt Lines n n
Trigger Lines n n
Processor Memory 111 DRAMWalk1 n
112 DRAMCell
113 DRAMMarch
114 NVRAM
PCI Bus 121 Scan Test n
Registers 131 PAI n
Display Registers 211 Display n

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 6-- 59

Troubleshooting

Table 6-- 6: Power-on diagnostic tests (Cont.)

Component Group & test Error codes Power on Extended

Acquisition Registers 311 DAC n
312 Demux
313 Atten
314 Preamp
315 PLL
316 ADC
Memory 321 MemData n
322 MemAddr
323 DataFormat
324 MemSpeed
Acq Modes 331 SubSample n
332 PeakDetect
333 HiRes
Interrupt 341 Bit Tests n
HF Step 351 PhaseCal n
Vertical 371 50OhmOvld n
372 ADC Connects
PLL 381 Clock Freq n
Trigger Registers 411 GTL n
412 BTL
413 DTC
414 ExtndTrg
415 AuxTrig
TrgLvlComp 421 LogicComp1 n
422 LogicComp2
423 LogicComp3
424 LogicComp4
GTL 431 TICounters n
432 GTLBigCntrs
Serial I/O 441 Atten n
442 Preamp
443 DTC
444 ExtendedTrg
445 Dacs
BTL 451 Ch1Edge n
452 AfterDBE
453 AfterDBT
454 Slewrate
455 LineTrig
456 BTL
Extended 461 Glitch n
462 PulseWidth
463 OptionST_ok
Nibble 471 Bus n

6-- 60 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Troubleshooting

Table 6-- 6: Power-on diagnostic tests (Cont.)

Component Group & test Error codes Power on Extended

Misc GPIB 511 Interface n
Factory Cal Integrity 521 Factory Cal Data n
Cal Integrity (run cal) 531 Cal Data n
Factory Bank2 Integrity 541 Factory Bank2 n

CheckIt Utilities If the oscilloscope passes all the BIOS tests and Windows boots, the primary tree
calls for you to run CheckIt Utilities diagnostics software. CheckIt Utilities
(Windows 2000) and QAPlus/Win (Windows 98) are comprehensive diagnostic
software applications to check and verify the operation of the PC hardware in the
oscilloscope.

CheckIt Utilities. To run the CheckIt Utilities, you must have either a working
keyboard, a pointing device (mouse), and Windows 2000 must be running.
Before starting the utilities install a test floppy disk in the floppy disk drive and a
test CD in the CD-ROM drive. Refer to the CheckIt Utilities online help for
additional information on running the utilities. Repair or replace any failed
component identified by the CheckIt Utilities.

QAPlus/Win Utilities. To run QAPlus/Win, you must have a working keyboard (a

working mouse or other pointing device is optional) and have the Windows 98
operating system running. Repair or replace any failed component identified by
QAPlus/Win.
To run the QAPlus/Win diagnostic software, do the following steps:
1. Exit the oscilloscope application.
a. Display the Task Manager by pressing CTRL, ALT, and Delete.
b. Select TekScope (TDS7000 on some instruments) and then touch End
Task.
c. Display the Task Manager by pressing CTRL, ALT, and Delete.
d. Select Windowsscopeservices and then touch End TAsk.
e. Display the Task Manager by pressing CTRL, ALT, and Delete.
f. Select Servercontrol, if displayed, and then touch End TAsk.
g. Display the Task Manager by pressing CTRL, ALT, and Delete.
h. Select Vxi11servercontrol, if displayed and then touch End TAsk.

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 6-- 61

Troubleshooting

2. Exit all other applications and exit all windows.

3. Click Start → Programs → QAPlus_Win → QAPlus_Win.
4. Touch OK and select the tests you want to perform.
5. To restore the oscilloscope to normal operating condition, reboot the
oscilloscope after QAPlus/Win diagnostic tests are complete.

Oscilloscope Diagnostics. If the oscilloscope passes all the CheckIt tests, the
primary tree calls for you to run the oscilloscope Diagnostics. The oscilloscope
Diagnostics are a comprehensive software test that checks the functionality of the
oscilloscope. If the oscilloscope Diagnostics test fails, the oscilloscope is
defective.
To run the oscilloscope Diagnostics, do the following steps:
1. Turn off all other applications.
2. From the menu bar, touch Utilities and then select Instrument Diagnostics.

Diagnostics The oscilloscope has two levels of internal diagnostics that focus on verifying,
adjusting, and if need be, isolating faulty modules.
Both levels of internal diagnostics report any bad modules. If a bad module is
found, replace the module.
The two levels of diagnostics are the short confidence set and the extended set
that tests the oscilloscope circuitry in depth and takes more time. At power on,
the oscilloscope automatically executes the short set. The extended set is optional
and is executed by using the following procedure:
Prerequisites: Power on the oscilloscope and allow a 20 minute warm-up before
doing this procedure.
1. Display the System diagnostics menu:
a. From the menu bar, touch Utilities and then select Instrument Diagnos-
tics.

Firmware Updates
Firmware updates are easy to do. Simply install the firmware CD in your
oscilloscope and follow the displayed instructions or the instructions that
accompany the CD.
If you want to order a firmware update, contact your Tektronix service center.

6-- 62 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Troubleshooting

After Repair
After removal and replacement of a module due to electrical failure, you must
perform the adjustment or software update as indicated in Table 6--7.

Table 6-- 7: Action required for module replaced

Module replaced Adjustment required1 Software update required

Front panel assembly No None
Acquisition board Yes None
PPC Processor board No1 Installation by Tektronix is
required
NLX processor assembly No Windows,
oscilloscope application
Display panel or display system No None
Power supply Yes None
Interconnect boards No None
Fans No None
1 Replacement of this board must be performed by Tektronix.

BIOS Error Messages (Bali NLX)

Table 6--8 lists error messages displayed by the BIOS.

Table 6-- 8: BIOS Error messages

Error message Explanation

GA20 Error An error occurred with Gate-A20 when switching to protected mode
during the memory test.
Pri Master HDD Error Could not read sector from corresponding drive.
Pri Slave HDD Error
Sec Master HDD Error
Sec Slave HDD Error
A: Drive Error No response from diskette drive.
B: Drive Error
Cache Memory Error An error occurred while testing L2 cache. Memory may be bad.
CMOS Battery Low Replace the battery soon.
CMOS Display Type Wrong The display type is different than what has been stored in CMOS.
Check Setup to make sure type is correct.
CMOS Check Sum Bad The CMOS checksum is incorrect. CMOS memory may have been
corrupted. Run Setup to reset values.

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 6-- 63

Troubleshooting

Table 6-- 8: BIOS Error messages (Cont.)

Error message Explanation

CMOS Settings Wrong CMOS values are not the same as the last boot. These values
have either been corrupted or the battery has failed.
CMOS Date/Time Not Set The time and/or date values stored in CMOS are invalid. Run
Setup to set correct values.
DMA Error Error during read/write test of DMA controller.
FDC Failure Error while trying to access diskette drive controller.
HDC Failure Error while trying to access hard disk controller.
Update Failed NVRAM was invalid but was unable to be updated.
Unlock Keyboard The system keyboard lock is engaged. The system must be
unlocked to continue to boot.
Keyboard Error Error in the keyboard connection. Make sure keyboard is
connected properly.
KB/Interface Error Keyboard interface test failed.
Timer Error Timer Test failed.
Memory Size Changed Memory size has changed since the last boot. If no memory was
added or removed, then memory may be bad.
Serial presence detect (SPD) device data missing or iinconclusive. System memory does not appear to be SPD memory.
Do you wish to boot at 100 MHz bus speed? [Y/N]
No Boot Device Available System did not find a boot device.
Off Board Parity Error A parity error occurred on an off-board card. This error is followed
by an address.
On Board Parity Error A parity error occurred in onboard memory. This error is followed by
an address.
Parity Error A parity error occurred in onboard memory at an unknown address.
NVRAM/CMOS/PASSWORD cleared by Jumper NVRAM, CMOS, and passwords have been cleared. The system
should be powered off and the jumper removed.
<CTRL_N> Pressed CMOS is ignored and NVRAM is cleared. User must enter Setup.

BIOS Error Messages (Radisys NLX)

When the NLX board powers-on, the BIOS runs power-on-self-tests to check the
board. The BIOS writes error codes to location 80h and tries to write the codes to
the display. If the error is fatal, then the error code indicates the last successful
checkpoint reached. Table 6--9 lists the error messages displayed by the Radisys
BIOS.
Once the display is enabled, errors are written to the display as text messages.
These messages are always displayed unless the board is configured for silent
boot or headless (no keyboard, mouse, or display) operation.

6-- 64 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Troubleshooting

Table 6-- 9: BIOS Error messages (Radisys)

Displayed Displayed
error code Error message error code Error message
02h Verify real mode 6Ch Display shadow message
03h Disable NMI 6Eh Display non-disposable segments
04h Get CPU type 70h Display error messages
06h Initialize system hardware 72h Check for configuration errors
08h Initialize chipset registers with initial POST values 74h Test real-time clock
09h Set POST flag 76h Check for keyboard errors
0Ah Initialize CPU registers 7Ah Test for key lock on
0Bh Enable CPU cache 7Ch Set up hardware interrupt vectors
0Ch Initialize cache to initial POST values 7Eh Test coprocessor if present
0Eh Initialize I/O 80h Disable on-board I/O ports
0Fh Initialize local bus IDE 81h Late device initialization
10h Initialize power management 82h Detect and install external RS-232 ports
11h Load alternate registers with initial POST values 83h Configure IDE controller
12h Restore CR0 84h Detect and install external parallel ports
13h Reset PCI BM 85h Initialize PCI PCC devices
14h Initialize keyboard controller 86h Reinitialize on-board I/O ports
16h BIOS ROM checksum 87h Configure MCD devices
17h Presize DRAM 88h Initialize BIOS data area
18h 8254 timer initialization 89h Initialize NMI
1Ah 8237 DMA controller initialization 8Ah Initialize extended BIOS data area
1Ch Reset programmable interrupt controller 8Bh Initialize mouse
20h Test DRAM refresh 8Ch Initialize floppy controller
22h Test 8742 keyboard controller 8Eh Execute auto-typing
24h Set ES segment register to 4GB 8Fh Hard disk controller fast preinitialization
26h Enable A20 90h Initialize hard disk controller
28h Auto-size DRAM 91h Initialize local bus hard disk controller
29h Initialize PMM 92h Jump to User-Patch2
2Ah Clear 512 Kb base RAM 93h Build MPTABLE for multiprocessor boards
2Ch Test 512 Kb base address lines 95h Install CD-ROM for boot
2Eh Test low byte of 512 Kb base memory 96h Clear huge ES segment register
2Fh Pre-system shadow 97h Fix up MP table
30h Test high byte of 512 Kb base memory 98h Search for option ROMs (beep for bad checksum)
32h Test CPU bus-clock frequency 99h Check for SMART HDD
33h Initialize PDM 9Ah Shadow option ROMs

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 6-- 65

Troubleshooting

Table 6-- 9: BIOS Error messages (Radisys) (Cont.)

Displayed Displayed
error code Error message error code Error message
34h Test CMOS RAM 9Ch Set up power management
35h Initialize alternate chipset registers 9Dh Initialize security
36h Warm start shutdown entry point 9Eh Enable hardware interrupts
37h Re-initialize the chipset 9Fh HDD fast initialization (second)
38h Shadow system BIOS ROM A0h Set time of day
39h Reinitialize the cache A2h Check key lock
3Ah Auto-size cache A4h Initialize typematic rate
3Ch Configure advanced chipset registers A8h Erase F2 prompt
3Dh Load alternate registers with CMOS values AAh Scan for F2 keystroke
3Eh Read HW ACh Enter SETUP
40h Set Initial CPU speed AEh Clear in-POST flag
42h Initialize interrupt vectors B0h Check for errors
44h Initialize BIOS interrupts B2h POST done—prepare to boot operating system
45h Core device initialization B4h One beep before boot
46h Check ROM copyright notice B5h Quiet boot end/display MultiBoot menu
48h Check video configuration against CMOS B6h Check password (optional)
49h Initialize PCI bus and devices B8h Clear global descriptor table
4Ah Initialize all video adapters in system B9h Prepare to boot
4Bh Display Quiet-Boot screen BAh DMI
4Ch Shadow video BIOS ROM BBh Initialize BCVS
4Eh Display copyright notice BCh Clear parity checkers
50h Display CPU type and speed BDh Boot Menu
51h Initialize EISA board BEh Clear screen (optional)
52h Test Keyboard BFh Check virus and backup reminders
54h Set key click if enabled C0h Try to boot with INT19
56h Enable keyboard C1h Initialize PEM
58h Test for unexpected interrupts C2h PEM log
59h Initialize PDS C3h PEM display
5Ah Display prompt “Press F2 to enter SETUP” C4h PEM system error initialization
5Bh CPU cache off C5h Dual CMOS
5Ch Test RAM between 512 Kb and 640 Kb C6h Docking initialization
5Eh Base address C7h Late docking initialization
60h Test extended memory D0h Interrupt handler error
62h Test extended memory address lines D2h Unknown interrupt error

6-- 66 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Troubleshooting

Table 6-- 9: BIOS Error messages (Radisys) (Cont.)

Displayed Displayed
error code Error message error code Error message
64h Jump to User-Patch1 D4h Pending interrupt error
66h Configure advanced cache registers D6h Initialize option ROM error
68h Enable external and CPU caches D8h Shutdown error
69h PM set up SMM DAh Extended block move
6Ah Display external cache size DCh Shutdown 10 error
6Bh Load custom defaults

BIOS Beep Codes (Bali NLX)

When an error occurs during the power on self test (POST), the BIOS displays an
error message describing the problem. The BIOS also issues a beep code (one
long tone followed by two short tones) during POST if the video configuration
fails (a faulty video card or no card installed) or if an external ROM module does
not properly checksum to zero.
An external ROM module (for example, a video BIOS) can also issue audible
errors, usually consisting of one long tone followed by a series of short tones. For
more information on the beep codes, check the documentation for the device.
There are several POST routines that issue a POST terminal error and shut down
the system if they fail. Before shutting down the system, the terminal-error
handler issues a beep code (see Table 6--10) signifying the test point error, writes
the error to I/O port 80h, attempts to initialize the video, and writes the error in
the upper left corner of the screen (using both monochrome and color adapters).
If the POST completes normally, the BIOS issues one short beep before passing
control to the operating system.

Table 6-- 10: Beep codes (Bali)

Beeps Description
1 Refresh failure
2 Parity cannot be reset
3 First 64 K memory failure
4 Timer not operational
5 Processor failure (not used)
6 8042 Gate A20 cannot be toggled
7 Exception interrupt error

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 6-- 67

Troubleshooting

Table 6-- 10: Beep codes (Bali) (Cont.)

Beeps Description
8 Display memory R/W error
9 ROM checksum error (not used)
10 CMOS shutdown register test error
11 Invalid BIOS (for example, POST module not found, etc.)

BIOS Beep Codes (Radisys NLX)

When the NLX board powers on, a number of the BIOS checkpoints generate an
audible ‘beep’ code on failure using the standard PC speaker (also routed through
the board audio system). The beep codes are made up of up to 4 groups of short
beeps and are listed in Table 6--11.
If your instrument does not contain a speaker, attach a speaker to the display-
adapter board square pins to hear the codes.

Table 6-- 11: Beep codes (Radisys)

Check-
point code Error message Beep code
16h BIOS ROM checksum 1-2-2-3
20h Test DRAM refresh 1-3-1-1
22h Test 8742 keyboard controller 1-3-1-3
2Ch Test 512 Kb base address lines 1-3-4-1
2Eh Test low byte of 512 Kb base memory 1-3-4-3
46h Check ROM copyright notice 2-1-2-3
58h Test for unexpected interrupts 2-2-3-1
98h Search for option ROMs (beep for bad checksum) 1-2
B4h One beep before boot 1

Dip Switch Controls

Dip switches are used to direct program flow during power on self test (POST).
A switch set to ON is closed and presents a low state (0 V) to the switch buffer.
This is the default switch position. A switch set to OFF is open and presents a
high state (3.3 V) to the switch buffer. This is the ‘set’ position. Table 6--12
describes the switch functions.

6-- 68 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Troubleshooting

Table 6-- 12: DIP switch functions

Test option
Switch Default Set Description
1 1 Meg RAM test 32 Meg RAM test POST does not know how much DRAM
is installed in the board.
2 Enable phase 2 POST Disable phase 2 POST Use to disable phase 2 of POST.
3 Do not loop on phase 2 POST Loop on entire phase 2 POST This switch is checked at every loop
iteration, so it is possible to break out of
this loop by moving switch 3 to the
default position. You can not loop on a
single passing test.
4 Allow debug output Suppress debug output Used by the console. Checked at every
write operation.
5 Loop on failing test Continue past failing test If a test fails (except DRAM march test)
and switch 6 is set, this switch is
checked. You can break out of the lop
by moving switch 5 to the set position,
removing the fault, or by setting switch 6
to the default position.
6 Stop on failing test Continue past failing test If set and a test fails, the program
checks switch 5. If not set, the program
will stop on a failure by branching to a
loop. To exit the loop, reset the power
PC.
7 Do not cycle application diagnostics Application diagnostic cycle If set, the power-up diagnostics cycle,
which prevents completion of the boot
sequence.
8 Do not force power-up diagnostics Forces power-up diagnostics At power-on this switch is checked, and
if set, power-up diagnostics will run.

Diagnostic LED
Table 6--13 lists the actions performed at power on of the Power PC (PPC) and
the associated display on the diagnostic LED. Until the MPC106 is initialized the
LED is not active. RESET forces the display to .8. H, L, P, and a blinking --
indicate where the program is in the power-up sequence. As tests occur, the
associated number is displayed on the LED. A failing test displays a decimal
point and the test number.

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 6-- 69

Troubleshooting

Table 6-- 13: Diagnostic LED

Diagnostic status
LED Passed test Testing Test method
.8 MPC740 initialization, Walk a one through configuration register. Use addresses
MPC106 walking one test, or FEC00000 and FEE00000. A one is walked through the lower
MPC106 configuration test data bus.
Requests the vendor ID. Use addresses FEC00000 and
FEE00000. Vendor ID data is presented on the lower data bus.
Data 0x0face106 is written to the MPC740 register gpr2 if the
correct vendor ID is returned. If the incorrect ID is returned,
data 0x01bad106 is written to the register.
0 MPC740 initialization, First PCI access test and This is not a pass/fail test, only an attempt to read the PCI bus.
MPC106 walking one test, or UART initialize Read the configuration space of the SIO. The SIO should
MPC106 configuration test return the vendor/device ID (0x00021057), within MPC740 gpr2
register. No data comparison or fault determination occurs. DIP
switches are not checked.
Set UART to 9600, n, 8, 1. No testing or fault reporting is
performed. Once completed, console is usable. Dip switches
are not checked.
1 First PCI access test and PC87560 walking-one Walk a one through the configuration register. Walk a one
UART initialize through the AD bus.
2 PC87560 walking-one PC87560 configuration Request vendor/device ID. Data 0x0face560 is written to
MPC740 register gpr6 if correct ID is returned. If incorrect ID is
returned, data 0x01bad560 is written to MPC740 register gpr6.
3 PC87560 configuration DEC21554 configuration Request vendor/device ID. Data 0x0face215 is written to
MPC740 register gpr6 if correct ID is returned. If incorrect ID is
returned, data 0x01bad215 is written to MPC740 register gpr6.
4 DEC21554 configuration RS232 interface test Send UUUUUUUU (55hex, 1010101 binary) to console.
5 RS232 interface test ROM checksum Calculate device checksum and compare with checksum in
ROM.
6 ROM checksum DRAM cell test with cache Test address lines. Write patterns to address range set by
switch 1. From start address (000000000) to end address, write
hex pattern aaaaaaaa. Repeat for hex patterns cccccccc and
f0f0f0f0.
7 DRAM cell test with cache DRAM march test with out DRAM march test. Test data lines. Write to address range set
cache by switch 1. Cache is disabled.
8 DRAM march test with out DRAM march test with cache Test data lines. Write to address range set by switch 1.
cache
9 DRAM march test with cache DRAM walking one Test data lines. Walk a one through DRAM memory location.
Cache is disabled. Walk a one through buss MEM_DL.
A DRAM walking one NVRAM walking one Walk a one through NVRAM memory location. Cache is
disabled. Walk a one through bus XPC_ISA_D.
H POST passed
L Boot parameters loaded and Program has loaded boot parameters and is waiting to connect
waiting for host to host.

6-- 70 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Troubleshooting

Table 6-- 13: Diagnostic LED (Cont.)

Diagnostic status

LED Passed test Testing Test method

P Loading files from host Program has connected to host and is loading oscilloscope
files.
— Load process complete Files have completed loading.

Troubleshooting Using Reset Circuits

The Power PC (PPC) board uses a combination of removable jumpers and
surface mount resistors to manipulate circuit reset for troubleshooting.
There are three PCI busses on the PPC board, the NLX primary PCI bus, L2 PCI
bus, and the embedded PPC PCI bus. A hardware fault on any of these busses
can prevent Windows from starting properly.

PPC (Oscilloscope)
NLX (Windows) Riser PCMCIA
J840

Transparent Bridge Bridge

NLX Primary PCI Bus Bus 1 PCMCIA
Bus 0 J841

C&T 6900 Video Adapter

Figure 6-- 34: The three PCI busses

Using jumpers J840 and J841 (see Figure 6--36 on page 6--73) you can selectively
remove components from the NLX primary PCI bus. This is useful when
Windows will not start. The PPC board components on the NLX primary PCI bus
are the DIGITAL 21150 transparent bridge, and the C&T 6900 video adapter.
Installing J840 forces the transparent bridge, all components on the L2 PCI bus,
and all components on the PPC PCI bus into reset. If this allows Windows to
start, you will need to eliminate the PPC PCI bus. The easiest way to force the
PPC PCI bus into reset is to press and hold the PPC reset button, S900. So,
remove J840, and holding the reset button, determine if the instrument will boot
to Windows.
Installing J841 removes the C&T69000 from the Windows side. Note, neither the
PPC ECB VGA port or the LCD will function if J841 is installed. Use the NLX
SVGA port (see Figure 6--35).

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 6-- 71

Troubleshooting

NOTE. The C&T69000 video adapter located on the Tektronix PPC board is the
primary video adapter. A second video adapter, the RAGE 2C, is located on the
NLX board. The RAGE is an AGP video adapter and the C&T69000 is a PCI bus
video adapter. The C&T69000 is made the primary video adapter because it can
drive LCD panels. Tektronix forces the C&T69000 to be the primary video
adapter via BIOS setting Advance→ Video Configuration→ Primary Video
Adapter = PCI.

NLX AGP Video

(Windows only)

PCI Video from PPC.

Same as LCD

Figure 6-- 35: PCI and NLX video connectors

6-- 72 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Troubleshooting

Reset
button

On/Stdby
debug button

J840 and J841

Figure 6-- 36: Location of jumpers and reset button

Update/Restore the NLX Board CMOS

If the CMOS parameters become corrupted, restore the CMOS memory using
one of the following procedures:

CAUTION. Only install CMOS parameters from Tektronix. CMOS parameters

from other manufactures may make your oscilloscope inoperable.

If you cannot restore the CMOS memory, replace the battery.

1. If your instrument uses Windows 98, restore the CMOS as follows:
a. Power on the oscilloscope.
b. After the oscilloscope displays Press <F1> to resume, power off the
instrument and then power it on again.
c. From the Windows operating system select Start, Programs, and then
MS-DOS Prompt.
H If you want your oscilloscope to have access to a network, enter the
following command:
CD ..\TEKTRONIX\CMOS

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 6-- 73

Troubleshooting

CMOS --R NET

H If you want your oscilloscope to not have access to a network, but be
able to boot faster, enter the following command:
CD ..\TEKTRONIX\CMOS
CMOS --R NONET
d. Power off your oscilloscope, and then power on your oscilloscope.
2. If your instrument uses Windows 2000, restore the CMOS as follows:

NOTE. Follow the instructions in the Instruction.doc file on the floppy disk.
Viewing this file requires Windows tools. The instrument can not view the file
while booting from the floppy disk.

a. Install the BIOS Update and LAN Enable floppy disk that came with
your Windows 2000 Operating System Restore CD.
b. Remove the hard drive from the instrument.
c. Power on the oscilloscope.
d. If the software suggests that you update your BIOS, let the software
update the BIOS.
e. To install the correct CMOS settings, select either Enable Networking or
Disable Networking. The instrument will boot faster with networking
disabled.
f. After the software updates your instrument settings, remove the floppy
disk.
g. Power off your oscilloscope.
h. Reinstall the hard drive.
i. Power on your oscilloscope.

Installing an Authorization Key

If you replace your PPC board or add a new options, you must install a new
authorization key. Install the authorization key using the following procedure:
1. From the oscilloscope menu bar, touch the Utilities menu, select Option
Installation, and then touch Continue.
2. Enter the new key using an attached keyboard.

6-- 74 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Troubleshooting

3. Touch Continue.

Hard Disk Drive Maintenance

Use the same procedures to maintain the oscilloscope hard disk drive that you
use to maintain a hard disk drive in a personal computer.
Using ScanDisk, attempt to fix the disk without destroying data on the disk. To
use ScanDisk, perform the following steps:
1. Remove the hard disk drive from the oscilloscope.
2. Install the hard disk drive into personal computer.
3. Power up the computer and run ScanDisk. Set Scandisk to perform a
thorough surface scan and to automatically fix errors.
H Using Microsoft Windows 98: select Start\Programs\Accessories\System
Tools\ScanDisk
H Using Microsoft MSDOS: enter SCANDISK drive: /SURFACE
/AUTOFIX
4. If ScanDisk will not repair the disk, format the hard disk drive using the File
Utilities Format command. Format will destroy all data currently on the disk.
5. If reformatting the hard disk and reloading the software will not repair the
disk, install a new hard disk drive.

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 6-- 75

Troubleshooting

6-- 76 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

Repackaging Instructions

This section contains the information needed to repackage the oscilloscope for
shipment or storage.

Packaging
When repacking the oscilloscope for shipment, use the original packaging. If the
packaging is unavailable or unfit for use, contact your local Tektronix representa-
tive to obtain new packaging.
Seal the shipping carton with an industrial stapler or strapping tape.

Shipping to the Service Center

Contact the Service Center to get an RMA (return material authorization)
number, and any return or shipping information you may need.
If the oscilloscope is being shipped to a Tektronix Service Center, enclose the
following information:
H The RMA number.
H The owner’s address.
H Name and phone number of a contact person.
H Type and serial number of the oscilloscope.
H Reason for returning.

H A complete description of the service required.

Mark the address of the Tektronix Service Center and the return address on the
shipping carton in two prominent locations.

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 6- 77

Repackaging Instructions

6- 78 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

Options and Accessories

This section lists the standard and optional accessories available for the
oscilloscope, as well as the product options.

Options
The following options can be ordered for the oscilloscope:

H Option 1K: K4000 Instrument Cart

H Option 1R: Rack Mount Kit (includes: hardware and instructions for
converting to rackmount configuration)
H Option 2M: Long record length: 2 Msamples per channel, 8 Msamples
maximum

H Option 3M: Long record length: 4 Msamples per channel, 16 Msamples

maximum
H International Power Cords Options:
H Option A1 -- Universal European 230 V, 50 Hz
H Option A2 -- United Kingdom 230 V, 50 Hz
H Option A3 -- Australian 230 V, 50 Hz
H Option A5 -- Switzerland 230 V, 50 Hz

H Option AC -- China 230 V, 50 Hz

H Option A99 -- No power cord
H Option SM: Serial Communications Mast Testing
H Option ST: Serial Pattern Triggering
H Option TDS7UP: Field upgrade options. Many are available. Contact
Tektronix (see page xvii) for a complete list of available TDS7UP options
H Option J1: TDSJIT2 Jitter Analysis application
H Option J2: TDSDDM2 Disk Drive Measurements application

H Option JT3: TDSJIT3 Advanced Jitter Analysis application with random and
deterministic jitter analysis

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 7- 1

Options and Accessories

H Option CP2: TDSCPM2 Compliance Testing for ITU-T G.703 and

ANSI T1.102 communications standards (Requires Option SM)
H Option USB: USB2 Compliance Testing Software for USB1.0/USB2.0
standards (requires TDSUSBF USB test fixture)
H Service offerings:

H Opt. C3: Calibration services extended to cover three years

H Opt. C5: Calibration services extended to cover five years
H Opt. D1: Calibration data report

H Opt. D3: Test Data for calibration services in Opt. C3

H Opt. D5: Test Data for calibration services in Opt. C5
H Opt. R3: Repair warranty extended to cover three years
H Opt. R5: Repair warranty extended to cover five years

Accessories
This section lists the standard and optional accessories available for this
oscilloscope.

Standard The following accessories are shipped with the oscilloscope:

Table 7- 1: Standard accessories

Accessory Part number

TDS7000 Series graphical packing list 071-0710-xx
TDS7000 Series User Manual 071-7010-xx
TDS7000 Series Reference kit 020-2404-xx
TDS7000 Series Product Software CD 063-3376-xx
TDS7000 Series Operating System Restore CD 020-2498-xx
TDS7000 Series Online Help ——
(part of the application software)
Optional Applications Software CD and Documentation Kit 020-2450-xx
Oscilloscope Analysis and Connectivity Made Easy Kit 020-2449-- xx
Option SM and ST User Manual 071-1035-xx
Performance Verification (a pdf file on the TDS7000 Series Product ——
Software CD)

7- 2 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Options and Accessories

Table 7- 1: Standard accessories (Cont.)

Accessory Part number

TDS7000 Series Programmer Online Guide (files on the TDS7000 ——
Series Product Software CD)
NIST, Z540-1, and ISO9000 Calibration Certificate ——
U.S. Power Cord 161-0104-00
Mouse 119-6298-xx
Front Cover 200-4519-xx
Accessory Pouch 016-1441-xx
Probe Calibration and Deskew Fixture, with instructions and BNC cable 067-0405-xx
Four P6139A Probes ——
Click’N Burn Software CD 063-3575-xx

Optional The accessories in Table 7--2 are orderable for use with the oscilloscope at the
time this manual was originally published. Consult a current Tektronix catalog
for additions, changes, and details.

Table 7- 2: Optional accessories

Accessory Part number

TDS7000 Series Service Manual 071-0711-xx
Transit Case 016-1522-xx
Scope Cart K4000 (Option 1K)
P6158 20x 1 kΩ low capacitance voltage divider probe P6158
P6139A 500 MHz passive 10x probe P6139A
P6243 1 GHz high speed active probe P6243
P6245 1.5 GHz high speed active probe P6245
P6246 400 MHz differential probe P6246
P6247 1 GHz differential probe P6247
P6248 1.5 GHz differential probe P6248
TCP202 DC to 50 MHz current probe TCP202
CT6 high frequency current probe CT6
AM503S DC/AC current measurement system AM503S
P5205 high voltage differential probe P5205
P5210 high voltage differential probe P5210
P6015A high voltage probe P6015A

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 7- 3

Options and Accessories

Table 7- 2: Optional accessories (Cont.)

Accessory Part number

ADA400A differential preamplifier ADA400A
P6701A/B optical/electrical converter (multi-mode) P6701A/B
P6703A/B optical/electrical converter (single-mode) P6703A/B
AMT75 1 GHz 75-ohm adapter AMT75
VocalLink Pro Voice Controlled Software VCLNKP
VocalLink Basic Voice Controlled Software VCLNKB
Wavewriter: AWG and waveform creation software S3FT400
TekTMS: Test Management System SFT001
LabWindows S3FG910
WSTRO WaveStar Software WSTRO
GPIB cable (1 m) 012-0991-01
GPIB cable (2 m) 012-0991-00
RS-232 cable 012-1298-xx
PS-2 keyboard 118-9402-00
USB Keyboard 119-6633-xx
Centronics cable 012-1214-xx
Replacement hard disk 650-0654-xx
AFTDS Telecomm differential electrical interface adapter (for line rates AFTDS
<8 Mb/s)
TDSUSBF USB test fixture; used with Option USB TDSUBF

7- 4 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

Electrical Parts List

The modules that make up this instrument are often a combination of mechanical
and electrical subparts. Therefore, all replaceable modules are listed in
Section 10, Mechanical Parts List. Refer to that section for part numbers when
using this manual.

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 8- 1

Electrical Parts List

8- 2 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

Diagrams

This section describes the electrical operation of the TDS7000 Digital Oscillo-
scope and modules using the major circuit blocks or modules. Figure 9--1 on
page 9--2 shows the oscilloscope module interconnections.

Symbols
Graphic symbols and class designation letters are based on ANSI Standard
Y32.2--1975. Abbreviations are based on ANSI Y1.1--1972.

Logic symbology is based on ANSI/IEEE Std 91-1984 in terms of positive logic.

Logic symbols depict the logic function performed and can differ from the
manufacturer’s data.
The tilde (~) preceding a signal name indicates that the signal performs its
intended function when in the low state.
Other standards used in the preparation of diagrams by Tektronix, Inc. are:
H Tektronix Standard 062--2476 Symbols and Practices for Schematic Drafting
H ANSI Y14.159--1971 Interconnection Diagrams
H ANSI Y32.16--1975 Reference Designations for Electronic Equipment
H MIL--HDBK--63038--1A Military Standard Technical Manual Writing
Handbook

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 9- 1

Diagrams

Floppy drive NLX board SVGA

USB
Riser Processor Sound
adapter Serial
board Parallel
Touch Display
panel panel Ethernet
Mouse
Display Inverter Keyboard
adapter board
board CD ROM

Hard drive

PPC board GPIB

ON/STANDBY Front RS232 (TTY0 (Diags)
panel Cal adjust lock
VGA
Fans

Power
LVPS board bus
(rear)
Power
bus J100
Acquisition
(front)
board
Ch1
Aux Out
Ch2
Ch3 Sig Out
Ch4 Probe Comp

Aux In

Figure 9- 1: TDS7000 series block diagram

9- 2 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

Mechanical Parts List

This section contains a list of the replaceable modules for the oscilloscope. Use
this list to identify and order replacement parts.

Parts Ordering Information

Replacement parts are available through your local Tektronix field office or
representative.

Changes to Tektronix instruments are sometimes made to accommodate

improved components as they become available and to give you the benefit of
the latest circuit improvements. Therefore, when ordering parts, it is important to
include the following information in your order.
H Part number
H Instrument type or model number

H Instrument serial number

H Instrument modification number, if applicable
If you order a part that has been replaced with a different or improved part, your
local Tektronix field office or representative will contact you concerning any
change in part number.

Module Servicing Modules can be serviced by selecting one of the following three options. Contact
your local Tektronix service center or representative for repair assistance.

Module Exchange. In some cases you may exchange your module for a reman-
ufactured module. These modules cost significantly less than new modules and
meet the same factory specifications. For more information about the module
exchange program, call 1-800-833-9200, select option 2.

Module Repair and Return. You may ship your module to us for repair, after which
we will return it to you.

New Modules. You may purchase replacement modules in the same way as other
replacement parts.

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 10- 1

Mechanical Parts List

Using the Replaceable Parts List

This section contains a list of the mechanical and/or electrical components that
are replaceable for the oscilloscope. Use this list to identify and order replace-
ment parts. The following table describes each column in the parts list.

Parts list column descriptions

Column Column name Description

1 Figure & Index Number Items in this section are referenced by component number.
2 Tektronix Part Number Use this part number when ordering replacement parts from Tektronix.
3 and 4 Serial Number Column three indicates the serial number at which the part was first effective. Column four
indicates the serial number at which the part was discontinued. No entries indicates the part is
good for all serial numbers.
5 Qty This indicates the quantity of parts used.
6 Name & Description An item name is separated from the description by a colon (:). Because of space limitations, an
item name may sometimes appear as incomplete. Use the U.S. Federal Catalog handbook
H6-1 for further item name identification.
7 Mfr. Code This indicates the code of the actual manufacturer of the part. (Code to name and address cross
reference is located after this page.)
8 Mfr. Part Number This indicates the actual manufacturer’s or vendor’s part number.

Abbreviations Abbreviations conform to American National Standard ANSI Y1.1--1972.

Mfr. Code to Manufacturer The following table cross indexes codes, names, and addresses of manufacturers
Cross Index or vendors of components listed in the parts list.

Manufacturers cross index

Mfr.
code Manufacturer Address City, state, zip code
00779 AMP INC. CUSTOMER SERVICE DEPT HARRISBURG, PA 17105-- 3608
PO BOX 3608
00779 TYCO ELECTRONICS CORPORATION CUSTOMER SERVICE DEPT~PO BOX 3608 HARRISBURG, PA 17105-- 3608
01963 CHERRY ELECTRICAL PRODUCTS CO 3600 SUNSET AVENUE WAUKEGAN, IL 60087-- 3214
049S6 FUJITSU COMPUTER PRODUCTS OF 2904 ORCHARD PARKWAY SAN JOSE, CA 95134-- 2009
AMERICA INC
05791 LYN-- TRON INC SOUTH 6001 THOMAS MALLEN RD SPOKANE, WA 99204
060D9 UNITREK CORPORATION 3000 COLUMBIA HOUSE BLVD, SUITE 1 VANCOUVER, WA 98661
20
06915 RICHCO 5825 N TRIPP AVE CHICAGO, IL 60646
P.O. BOX 804238
07416 NELSON NAME PLATE COMPANY 3191 CASITAS AVENUE LOS ANGELES, CA 90039-- 2410

10- 2 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Mechanical Parts List

Manufacturers cross index (cont.)

Mfr.
code Manufacturer Address City, state, zip code
0J9P9 GEROME MFG CO INC PO BOX 737 NEWBERG, OR 97132
403 NORTH MAIN
0KB01 STAUFFER SUPPLY CO 810 SE SHERMAN PORTLAND, OR 97214-- 4657
0KB05 NORTH STAR NAMEPLATE INC 5750 NE MOORE COURT HILLSBORO, OR 97124-- 6474
0KBZ5 Q & D PLASTICS INC 1812 - 16TH AVENUE FOREST GROVE, OR 97116-- 0487
PO BOX 487
12136 PHC INDUSTRIES INC 1643 HADDON AVE CAMDEN, NJ 08103
PO BOX 1448
1DM20 PARLEX CORP 7 INDUSTRIAL WAY SALEM, NH 03079
22526 FCI/BERG ELECTRONICS INC 825 OLD TRAIL ROAD ETTERS, PA 17319-- 9769
22670 GM NAMEPLATE INCORPORATED 2040 15TH AVE WEST SEATTLE, WA 98119-- 2783
24931 FCI/BERG ELECTRONICS INC RF/COAXIAL DIV FRANKLIN, IN 46131
2100 EARLYWOOD DR
PO BOX 547
26003 MARTEK POWER MDI 4115 SPENCER STREET TORRANCE, CA 90503-- 2489
2K262 BOYD CORPORATION 6136 NE 87TH AVENUE PORTLAND, OR 97220
34649 INTEL CORPORATION 3065 BOWERS SANTA CLARA, CA 95051-- 8130
PO BOX 58130
46628 LOGITECH INC 6505 KAISER DR FREMONT, CA 94555
50356 TEAC AMERICA INC 7733 TELEGRAPH RD MONTEBELLO, CA 90640-- 6537
PO BOX 750
52833 KEY TRONIC CORPORATION N 4424 SULLIVAN RD~PO BOX 14687 SPOKANE, WA 99214-- 0687
5Y400 TRIAX METAL PRODUCTS INC 1880 SW MERLO DRIVE BEAVERTON, OR 97006
6Y440 MICRON SEMICONDUCTOR PRODUCTS INC 8000 S FEDERAL WAY BOISE, ID 83707-- 0006
PO BOX 6
61058 MATSUSHITA ELECTRIC CORP OF AMERICA PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL CO DIV SECAUCUS, NJ 07094
TWO PANASONIC WAY
71400 BUSSMANN DIVISION COOPER INDUSTRIES INC ST LOUIS, MO 63178
PO BOX 14460
74594 COMPONENT RESOURCES INC BUSSMAN PARTS BEAVERTON, OR 97006
C/O CASEY LAKEY
14525 SW WALKER ROAD
75915 LITTELFUSE INC 800 E NORTHWEST HWY DES PLAINES, IL 60016-- 3049
76096 ELMA ELECTRONICS INC 41440 CHRISTY ST FREMONT, CA 94538
78189 SHAKEPROOF DIVISION OF ILLINOIS TOOL WORK ELGIN, IL 60120
ST. CHARLES ROAD
7X318 KASO PLASTICS INC 5720-- C NE 121ST AVE, STE 110 VANCOUVER, WA 98682
80009 TEKTRONIX INC 14150 SW KARL BRAUN DR BEAVERTON, OR 97077-- 0001
PO BOX 500
9F560 IBM CORPORATION 420 E SOUTH TEMPLE ST SALT LAKE CITY, UT 84145
S5769 NEC CORPORATION NEC BUILDING TOKYO, JP 108
7-- 1, SHIBA 5 CHOME
MINATO-- KU
TK0588 UNIVERSAL PRECISION PRODUCT 1775 NW CORNELIUS PASS RD HILLSBORO, OR 97124
TK1943 NEILSEN MANUFACTURING INC 3501 PORTLAND RD NE SALEM, OR 97303

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 10- 3

Mechanical Parts List

Manufacturers cross index (cont.)

Mfr.
code Manufacturer Address City, state, zip code
TK2250 ARROW ELECTRONICS INC. 9500 SW NIMBUS AVE, BLDG E BEAVERTON, OR 97008-- 7163
TK2376 CONDUCTIVE RUBBER TECH 22125 17TH AVE SE, SUITE 117 BOTHELL, WA 98021
TK2491 RIFOCS CORPORATION 1340 FLYNN RD CAMARILLO, CA 93012
TK2548 XEROX CORPORATION 14181 SW MILLIKAN WAY BEAVERTON, OR 97005
TK2565 VISION PLASTICS INC 26000 SW PARKWAY CENTER DRIVE WILSONVILLE, OR 97070
TK2582 TUFF CAT USA LLC 814 N HAYDEN MEADOWS DRIVE PORTLAND, OR 97217
TK6173 MULTI-- FINELINE ELECTRONIX INC (MFLEX) DBA: MFLEX ANAHEIM, CA 92806
1301 N DYNAMICS STREET
TK6181 IMC PLASTICS INC 19400 SW TETON AVE TUALATIN, OR 97062
TK6253 VOLEX INTERCONNECT INC 646 CARRIBEAN DR SUNNYVALE, CA 94089-- 1108

10- 4 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Mechanical Parts List

Replaceable Parts List

Fig. &
index Tektronix part Serial no. Serial no. Mfr.
number number effective discont’d Qty Name & description code Mfr. part number
10-- 1-- 1 016-- 1441-- 00 1 POUCH, PLASTIC: POUCH 80009 016-- 1441-- 00
-2 211-- 1050-- 00 10 SCREW,MACHINE:6-- 32 X 0.312 L,PNH,STL CAD,T15 0KB01 OBD
-3 355-- 0298-- 00 4 STUD.SNAP:0.570 DIA,0.165 THK,STAINLESS STEEL TK0588 355-- 0298-- 00
-4 348-- 1648-- 00 4 FOOT:REAR W/CORD WRAP,THERMOPLASTIC TK6181 348164800
-5 211-- 0720-- 00 4 SCR,ASSEM WSHR:6-- 32 X 0.500,PNH,STL,CDPL,T-- 15 TORX 0KB01 ORDER BY
DESCRIPTION
-6 161-- 0104-- 01 1 CABLE ASSY,PWR,:3,18 AWG,92 L,SVT, TK2432 ORDER BY DESC
(STANDARD ACCESSORY)
-7 159-- 0046-- 00 2 FUSE,CARTRIDGE:3AG,8A,250V,15SEC,CER 71400 ABC 8
159-- 0381-- 00 2 FUSE,CARTRIDGE:5 X 20 MM,6.3A,250V,FAST BLOW,HIGH 71400 GDA-- 6.3
BREAKING CAPACITY,UL REC,SEMKO,
-8 200-- 2264-- 00 2 CAP,FUSEHOLDER:3AG FUSES (AMERICAN) 61935 FEK 031 1666
200-- 2265-- 00 2 CAP,FUSEHOLDER:5 X 20MM FUSES (EUROPEAN) 61935 FEK 031.1663
-9 200-- 4522-- 00 1 COVER,RIGHT:PCABS,13.645L X 8.250W, BLUE TK6181 200-- 4522-- 00
- 10 212-- 0232-- 00 2 SCREW,MACHINE:8-- 32 X 1.125L, PNH,STL,BLACK 0KB01 OBD
OXIDE,T-- 20
- 11 367-- 0477-- 00 B010100 B029999 1 HANDLE,CARRYING:POLYPROPYLENE VINYL GRIP 12136 PT 3170
- 12 367-- 0528-- 00 B010100 1 HANDLE,CARRYING:DUAL DUROMETER 12136 367-- 0528-- 00
MOLDED,POLYPROPYLENE,VINYL GRIP SECTION,
- 13 407-- 4887-- 00 B010100 1 BRACKET:HANDLE BASE,PC/ABS ALLOY,BAYER BAYBLEND TK2565 407-- 4887-- 00
FR-- 110,TEK BLUE,
- 14 200-- 4511-- 01 1 COVER:BOTTOM RIGHT 0J9P9 200-- 4511-- 01
- 15 200-- 4622-- 00 1 COVER ASSEMBLY:BOTTOM,VINYL CLAD AL,W/FEET 0J9P9 200-- 4622-- 00
(ITEMS 13 & 14)
- 16 348-- 1515-- 00 1 FEET,CABINET:CABINET FEET,BLACK,GLASS-- FIBRE 76096 63-- 526
REINFORCED PLASTIC,SET OF 4 FEET, W/SCREWS
- 17 333-- 4315-- 01 1 PANEL,FRONT:ACQUISITION I/O PANEL, AL, LEXAN 22670 333-- 4315-- 01
- 18 200-- 4519-- 00 1 COVER,FRONT:PCABS,17.420L X 8.670W X 2.000 TK6181 200-- 4519-- 00
- 19 101-- 0151-- 01 1 TRIM,FRONT:PCABS,17.200W X 8.450H, SILVER GRAY TK6181 101-- 0151-- 01
- 20 260-- 2719-- 00 1 SWITCH,KEYPAD:ELASTOMERIC,FRONT PANEL,ON/OFF TK2376 260-- 2719-- 00
- 21 335-- 0260-- 00 1 MARKER,IDENT:LABEL,MKD TDS7054 DIGITAL PHOSPHOR 80009 335-- 0260-- 00
OSCILLOSCOPE,500 MHZ 5 GS/S,
335-- 0261-- 00 1 MARKER,IDENT:LABEL,MKD TDS7104 DIGITAL PHOSPHOR 80009 335-- 0261-- 00
OSCILLOSCOPE,1GHZ,10 GS/S,
- 22 200-- 4510-- 01 1 COVER:TOP LEFT 0J9P9 200-- 4510-- 01
- 23 200-- 4521-- 00 1 COVER,LEFT:PCABS,13.654L X 8.250W,BLUE TK6181 200-- 4521-- 00
- 24 200-- 4520-- 00 1 COVER,TOP:PCABS,17.200L X 13.550W,BLUE TK6181 200-- 4520-- 00

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 10- 5

 Mechanical Parts List

1 2
3 4 5

6
7
24 8
23

22
10

21
11

20
12 13
19

2
17 14

18 2 15

16

16

Figure 10- 1: External parts

10- 6 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Mechanical Parts List

Replaceable Parts List

Fig. &
index Tektronix part Serial no. Serial no. Mfr.
number number effective discont’d Qty Name & description code Mfr. part number
10-- 2-- 1 211-- 1050-- 00 8 SCREW,MACHINE:6-- 32 X 0.312 L,PNH,STL CAD,T15 0KB01 OBD
-2 065-- 0654-- 03 1 RHDD ASSEMBLY:W/O SW (ITEMS 3 THROUGH 7) 80009 650-- 4018-- 03
-3 065-- 0633-- 01 1 DISK DRIVE:WINCHESTER,2.5 IN, 20.0GB,SINGLE PLATTER 9F560 07N8325
-4 437-- 0494-- 00 1 CABINET ASSY:REMOVEABLE HARD DISK DRIVE HOLDER 7X318 437-- 0494-- 00
-5 211-- 1081-- 00 4 SCREW,MACHINE:M3 X 0.5 X 3.5MM 0KB01 211-- 1081-- 00
-6 174-- 3925-- 00 1 CA ASSY,SP:RIBBON,,28 AWG,1.0 L,2 X 22 060D9 174-- 3925-- 00
-7 679-- 4378-- 00 1 CKT BD SUBASSY:HARD DISK DRIVE INTERFACE 80009 679-- 4378-- 00
-8 174-- 4320-- 00 2 CA ASSY:FLAT FLEX,26 POS, 9.753L (FLOPPY DRIVE & 060D9 174-- 4320-- 00
FRONT PANEL)
-9 not replaceable1 1 CIRCUIT BD ASSY:PROCESSOR 80009 671-- 5461-- 00
- 10 407-- 4706-- 00 1 BRACKET:FLOPPY DRIVE,6.064 X 5.075,ALUMINUM TK1943 407-- 4706-- 00
- 11 211-- 1079-- 00 2 SCREW,MACHINE:2.6 X 0.45 MM,3.0L,PNH,STL,PHILLIPS 0KB01 10310188-- 0
- 12 119-- 6106-- 00 1 DISK DRIVE:FLOPPY,3.5INCH,1.44 MB, 0.5 IN,DDDS TK2250 FD-- 05HF5630
- 13 679-- 4840-- 00 1 CKT BD SUBASSY:PRODUCTION PA BUS 80009 679-- 4840-- 00
- 14 679-- 4477-- 00 1 CKT BD SUBASSY:REAR POWER DISTRIBUTION 80009 679-- 4477-- 00
- 15 361-- 1762-- 00 1 SPACER,SUPPORT:0.250 X 0.171 X 0.375,CKT BD,NYLON 06915 CPST-- 4-- 01
- 16 679-- 4476-- 00 1 CKT BD SUBASSY:FRONT POWER DISTRIBUTION 80009 679-- 4476-- 00
- 17 614-- 1007-- 00 1 PANEL ASSY:FRONT, W/HARDWARE 80009 614-- 1007-- 00
(ITEMS 18 THROUGH 23)
- 18 679-- 5366-- 00 1 CKT BD SUBASSY:FRONT PANEL 80009 679-- 5366-- 00
- 19 260-- 2757-- 00 1 SWITCH,KEYPAD:ELASTOMERIC,FRONT PANEL 22670 260-- 2757-- 00
- 20 366-- 0821-- 00 7 KNOB,CAP:W/RED DOT,0.650 D,FR110,SILVER GRAY 22670 366-- 0821-- 00
- 21 366-- 0819-- 00 1 KNOB,EPS:W/RED DOT,PUSH BUTTON,SILVER GRAY 22670 366-- 0819-- 00
- 22 366-- 0820-- 00 7 KNOB,CAP:W/RED DOT,0.425 DIA,TEK SILVER GRAY 22670 366-- 0820-- 00
- 23 333-- 4364-- 00 1 SUBPANEL ASSY:OFF SET 7X318 333-- 4364-- 00
- 24 650-- 4186-- 01 1 MODULE ASSY:TOUCH PANEL (INCLUDES ITEM 25) 80009 650-- 4186-- 01
- 25 259-- 0155-- 01 1 FLEX CIRCUIT:POWER FLEX CIRCUIT SILVER INK 07416 259-- 0155-- 01
- 26 650-- 4189-- 02 1 MODULE ASSY:LCD (INCLUDES ITEMS 27 THROUGH 29) 80009 650-- 4189-- 02
- 27 174-- 4189-- 00 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY:FLAT FLEX,DISPLAY ADAPTER 1DM20 174-- 4189-- 00
- 28 679-- 5244-- 00 1 CKT BD :DISPLAY ADAPTER,W/HARDWARE 80009 679-- 5244-- 00
- 29 174-- 3618-- 00 1 CA,ASSY SP:RIBBON,CPR,28 AWG,9.5 L,1X5,0.049CTR 060D9 OBD
- 30 343-- 1676-- 00 1 CONN,RCPT,ELEC:MATES W/(8) 36 CONT 80009 343-- 1676-- 00
- 31 437-- 0486-- 01 1 ASSY,FAN:SIX FANS ASSEMBLY 0J9P9 437-- 0486-- 01
- 32 174-- 4188-- 00 1 CA ASSY:RIBBON (DISPLAY) 060D9 174-- 4188-- 00
- 33 159-- 5017-- 00 1 FUSE:7.0A,125V,FAST BLOW,FUSE IN HOLDER,0.383L X 75915 154 007
0.198W X 0.15H,16MM T&R,
- 34 679-- 4379-- 00 1 CKT BD SUBASSY:CONNECTOR CONVERSION 80009 679-- 4379-- 00
- 35 174-- 4321-- 00 1 CA ASSY:FLAT FLEX,26POS,10.440L (HARD DRIVE) 060D9 174-- 4321-- 00
1 This part must be replaced by Tektronix.

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 10- 7

Mechanical Parts List

3
35 4
5
6
7 2
34
8

33
32 1
9
10
8

31

11
30
12

26 29
28
27

24
25
13

14

23 16
18 15
22

21 19
17
20

Figure 10- 2: Front panel and drives

10- 8 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Mechanical Parts List

Replaceable Parts List

Fig. &
index Tektronix part Serial no. Serial no. Mfr.
number number effective discont’d Qty Name & description code Mfr. part number
10-- 3-- 1 119-- 6511-- 00 1 IC,PROCESSOR:CMOS,MICROPROCESSOR,CELERON, 34649 BX80526F566128
566 MHZ,66MHZ BUS,SOCKET 370 COMPATIB
- 1A 119-- 6459-- 00 1 FAN,CHIP COOLER:12VDC,80MA,4400RPM,30DBA,64MM X 80009 119-- 6459-- 00
51MM X 31MM,W/HEATSINK & CLIP FOR CELERON
-2 214-- 3903-- 00 8 SCREW,JACK:4-- 40 X 0.312 LONG,0.188 H HEX HEAD STAND 05791 LT4276
OFF,4-- 40 INT THD, X 0.312 THD EXT 4-- 40
-3 050-- 3506-- 05 1 NLX BOARD:NLX 80009 050-- 3506-- 05
-4 211-- 1050-- 00 8 SCREW,MACHINE:6-- 32 X 0.312 L,PNH,STL CAD PLT,T15 0KB01 OBD
-5 679-- 4667-- 00 1 CKT BD SUBASSY:RISER 80009 679-- 4667-- 00
-6 348-- 1733-- 00 1 SHIELD,EMI BRACKET,DRIVE BAY TK1943 348173300
-7 211-- 1050-- 00 4 SCREW,MACHINE:6-- 32 X 0.312 L,PNH,STL CAD PLT,T15 0KB01 OBD
-8 213-- 1061-- 00 2 JACKSCREW:6-- 32 X 0.320 EXT THD,M3.5 X 0.6-- 6 INT THD X 00779 554043-- 3
0.215L,GPIB
-9 386-- 7147-- 00 1 PANEL,I/O:ALUMINUM,POWER PC PROCESSOR TK1943 386-- 7147-- 00
- 10 131-- 6680-- 00 1 CONN HDR:SMD,MALE,RTANG,2 X 34 22526 61555-- 200CA
- 11 211-- 0887-- 00 4 SCREW,METRIC:M2 X 0.4 X 16 MM L,PH,PHILLIPS DRIVE 0KB01 211-- 0887-- 00
- 12 131-- 1315-- 01 B050100 2 CONN,RF:BNC/PNL,50 OHM PELTOLA/WITH HARDWARE 24931 28JR306-- 1
TDS7104
131-- 1315-- 01 B040100 2 CONN,RF:BNC/PNL,50 OHM PELTOLA/WITH HARDWARE 24931 28JR306-- 1
TDS7054
- 13 441-- 2177-- 00 1 CHASSIS:MAIN 0J9P9 441-- 2177-- 00
- 14 119-- 5806-- 05 1 POWER SUPPLY:CUSTOM,AC-- DC,375W,85-- 275VAC 26003 119-- 5806-- 05
- 15 210-- 0465-- 00 1 NUT,PLAIN,HEX:0.25-- 32 X 0.375,BRS CD PL 0KB01 ORDER BY DE-
SCRIPTION
- 16 210-- 0046-- 00 1 WASHER,LOCK:0.261 ID,INTL,0.018 THK,STL CD PL 78189 1214-- 05-- 00-- 0541C
- 17 136-- 0140-- 00 1 JACK,TIP:BANANA,CHARCOAL GRAY 0KBZ5 N/A
- 18 156-- 4828-- 00 1 IC,MEMORY:CMOS,SDRAM,16MEG X 64, SYNC, S5769 MC-4516CD646-A10
UNBUFFERED,3.3V,MC-- 4516CD646-- A10,DIMM168
- 19 441-- 2183-- 02 1 CHASSIS:REAR DRIVE BAY (HDD & CD-- ROM) AL & STEEL TK1943 441-- 2183-- 02
- 20 407-- 4709-- 00 B010100 B029999 1 BRACKET,CD-- ROM:STEEL (TDS7054) TK1943 407-- 4709-- 00
407-- 4709-- 00 B010100 B039999 1 BRACKET,CD-- ROM:STEEL (TDS7104) TK1943 407-- 4709-- 00
407-- 4880-- 01 B030000 1 BRACKET,CD-- ROM:STEEL (TDS7054) TK1943 407-- 4880-- 01
407-- 4880-- 01 B040000 1 BRACKET,CD-- ROM:STEEL (TDS7104) TK1943 407-- 4880-- 01
- 21 174-- 4231-- 00 1 CABLE ASSY:CABLE ASSEMBY (CD-- ROM) 060D9 174-- 4231-- 00
- 22 671-- 4377-- 00 1 CIRCUIT BD ASSY:CD ROM INTERFACE 80009 671-- 4377-- 00

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 10- 9

Mechanical Parts List

Replaceable Parts List (Cont.)

Fig. &
index Tektronix part Serial no. Serial no. Mfr.
number number effective discont’d Qty Name & description code Mfr. part number
- 23 119-- 5728-- 01 B010100 B029999 1 DISK DRIVE:OPTICAL,644MB,CD-- ROM,16.7 MB/SEC 50356 CD-- 224E-- 903
(TDS7054)
119-- 5728-- 01 B010100 B039999 1 DISK DRIVE:OPTICAL,644MB,CD-- ROM,16.7 MB/SEC 50356 CD-- 224E-- 903
(TDS7104)
119-- 6691-- 00 B030000 1 DISK DRIVE:644MEG,CD-- RW,16.6 MB/SEC,IDE/ATAPI 50356 CD-- W28E-- 93
(TDS7054)
119-- 6691-- 00 B040000 1 DISK DRIVE:644MEG,CD-- RW,16.6 MB/SEC,IDE/ATAPI 50356 CD-- W28E-- 93
(TDS7104)
- 24 211-- 1070-- 00 4 SCREW:M2 X 2MM,PNH,PHL, STL NI PLT 0KB01 211-- 1070-- 00
- 25 441-- 2184-- 00 B010100 B029999 1 CHASSIS,NLX:ALUMINUM,W/HARDWARE (TDS7054) TK1943 441-- 2184-- 00
441-- 2184-- 00 B010100 B039999 1 CHASSIS,NLX:ALUMINUM,W/HARDWARE (TDS7104) TK1943 441-- 2184-- 00
441-- 2279-- 00 B030100 1 CHASSIS,NLX:ALUMINUM,W/HARDWARE (TDS7054) TK1943 441-- 2279-- 00
441-- 2279-- 00 B040100 1 CHASSIS,NLX:ALUMINUM,W/HARDWARE (TDS7104) TK1943 441-- 2279-- 00
- 26 211-- 0720-- 00 5 SCR,ASSEM WSHR:6-- 32,0.500,PNH,STL,CDPL,T-- 15 0KB01 ORDER BY
DESCRIPTION
- 27 156-- 4828-- 00 B010100 B039999 1 IC,MEMORY:CMOS,SDRAM,16MEG X 64, SYNC, S5769 MC-4516CD646-A10
UNBUFFERED,3.3V,MC-- 4516CD646-- A10,DIMM168
156-- 9074-- 00 B040100 2 IC,MEMORY; CMOS,DRAM;32MEG X 64,256MEG, 6Y440 MT16LSDT3264AG--
SDRAM,PC100;MT16LSDT3264AG-- 10E,DIMM168 10EB1

10- 10 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Mechanical Parts List

1 1A

2
27
26 3 6
4

5 4
23
25
22
24

21
7

20

19 9
18 10

11

12

13

14

16 15
17
4

Figure 10- 3: Power supply

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 10- 11

Mechanical Parts List

Replaceable Parts List

Fig. &
index Tektronix Serial no. Serial no. Mfr.
number part number effective discont’d Qty Name & description code Mfr. part number
10-- 4-- 1 671-- 5557-- 00 1 CIRCUIT BD ASSY:ACQUISITION (TDS7054) 80009 671-- 5557-- 00
671-- 5558-- 00 1 CIRCUIT BD ASSY:ACQUISITION (TDS7104) 80009 671-- 5558-- 00
-2 174-- 2031-- 00 6 CABLE ASSY:COAX,RFP,50 OHM,6.5L,PELTOLA BOTH ENDS TK2338 174-- 2031-- 00
-3 348-- 1667-- 00 1 GASKET,EMI:SHIELD,0.005 SSTL 2K262 348-- 1667-- 00
-4 259-- 0157-- 00 1 FLEX CIRCUIT:LEVEL II PROBE INTERFACE TK6173 259-- 0157-- 00
-5 131-- 1315-- 01 4 CONN,RF JACK:BNC/PNL,50 OHM PELTOLA/REAR PNL, 24931 28JR306-- 1
WITH HARDWARE

Figure 10- 4: Acquisition assembly

10- 12 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual

 Mechanical Parts List

1 2 3 4 5

Figure 10- 5: Accessories

Replaceable Parts List

Fig. &
index Tektronix Serial no. Serial no. Mfr.
number part number effective discont’d Qty Name & description code Mfr. part number
STANDARD ACCESSORIES
10-- 5-- 1 161-- 0104-- 05 1 CA ASSY,PWR:3,1.0MM SQ,250V/10A,2.5 M S3109 198-- 010
(OPTION A3 - AUSTRALIAN)
-2 161-- 0104-- 06 1 CA ASSY,PWR:3,1.0MM SQ,250V/10A,2.5 M S3109 198-- 010
(OPTION A1 - EUROPEAN)
-3 161-- 0104-- 07 1 CA ASSY,PWR:3,1.0MM SQ,240V/10A,2.5 M S3109 209010
(OPTION A2 - UNITED KINGDOM)
-4 161-- 0167-- 00 1 CA ASSY,PWR:3,0.75MM SQ,250V/10A,2.5 M S3109 ORDER BY DESC
(OPTION A5 - SWITZERLAND)
-5 161-- 0306-- 00 1 CA ASSY,PWR:3,1.0MM SQ,250V/10A,2.5 M TK6253 92-- 2637-- 250BKH
(OPTION AC - CHINA)
-------- 1 CABLE ASSY,PWR,:3,18 AWG,92 L
(STANDARD CABLE - SEE FIG 10-- 1-- 6)
-------- 1 POUCH, PLASTIC:POUCH TK2582 TK1441 BLACK
(STANDARD CABLE - SEE FIG 10-- 1-- 1) CORDURA
020-- 2437-- 03 1 SOFTWARE KIT:OS RESTORE,WIN 98 RESTORE CD 80009 020-- 2437-- 03
020-- 2498-- 00 1 SOFTWARE KIT:OS RESTORE,WIN 2000 RESTORE CD 80009 020-- 2498-- 00
020-- 2404-- 02 1 REFERENCE KIT:LANGUAGE MANUALS,TDS7054,TDS7104 80009 020-- 2404-- 02
071-- 7010-- 02 1 MANUAL,TECH:USER,TDS6000,TDS7000 TK2548 071-- 7010-- 02
071-- 7000-- 02 1 MANUAL,TECH:REFERENCE,ENGLISH,TDS6000,TDS7000 TK2548 071-- 7000-- 02
119-- 6298-- 00 1 MOUSE:LOGITECCH WHEEL MOUSE 46628 830306-- 001
067-- 0405-- 02 1 FIXTURE,CAL:PROBE CAL DESKEW 80009 067-- 0405-- 02
020-- 2449-- 02 1 ACCESSORY KIT:OSCILLOSCOPE ANALYSIS & TK2548 020-- 2449-- 02
CONNETIVITY MADE EASY MANUAL W/SW
063-- 3376-- 09 1 SOFTWARE PKG:PRODUCT SOFTWARE,V2.3.2,CD TK2548 063-- 3376-- 09
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
119-- 6633-- 00 1 KEYBOARD:USB KEYBOARD CHERR 01963 G81-- 3505-- LAAUS

TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual 10- 13

Mechanical Parts List

Replaceable Parts List (Cont.)

Fig. &
index Tektronix Serial no. Serial no. Mfr.
number part number effective discont’d Qty Name & description code Mfr. part number
071-- 0711-- 02 1 MANUAL,TECH:SERVICE TDS7000 TK2548 071-- 0711-- 02
016-- 1790-- 04 Kit:RACKMOUNT (OPTION 1R) 80009 016-- 1790-- 04

10- 14 TDS7104 & TDS7054 Service Manual